A Foodcentric Life

  • Mother's Day
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Mother's Day
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Mother's Day
    • Meet Chef Sally
    • Recipe Index
    • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • ×
    Home » Recipes

    Bison Bolognese(Ground Bison Meat Sauce)

    10/04/2015 by Sally Cameron 24 Comments

    bison bolognese with pasta

    Pasta with a hearty meat sauce is a timeless favorite, and this bison bolognese is a flavorful twist on the classic. While traditional bolognese is made with ground beef, veal, pork, or a combination, this version uses lean, protein-rich ground bison. It's not a traditional bolognese, but it's rich, hearty, and packed with flavor-perfect for a healthier take on a meaty marinara. Pick up some ground bison and give it a try, and extra freezes beautifully.

    bison bolognese with pasta

    We eat a lot of chicken and turkey, so my first test of this recipe was with ground turkey. While it was very good (and you can certainly use dark meat turkey), I wanted something different. Something richer. Bison was just the thing.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll love Bison Bolognese

    • Lean & healthy - Made with ground bison, lower in fat than beef but still rich in flavor.
    • A lighter alternative - A fresh take on classic Bolognese.
    • Freezer-friendly - Doubles well, freezes beautifully, and reheats great.
    • Easy to make - Simple steps and pantry staples; most of the cooking is hands-off.

    Chef's tip: Bison is a leaner choice compared ground beef and a healthy choice for meat eaters that you can find at most markets. Another health benefit, bison are raised on pasture, not in feedlots or on factory farms. If you want to swap bison and use ground beef, use pasture raised beef as the best choice.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Extra virgin olive oil - For sautéing the vegetables and building flavor.
    • Onion, celery, and carrot - The classic soffritto base that gives depth and sweetness.
    • Garlic - Adds aromatic punch.
    • Italian herb blend - Use a dried mix, or substitute basil, oregano, thyme, or rosemary.
    • Bay leaf - A gentle herbal note that balances the richness.
    • Ground bison - Leaner than beef but still flavorful; healthier and a bit lighter.
    • Dry white wine (optional) - Adds acidity and complexity; substitute broth if preferred.
    • Canned tomatoes - You'll need whole tomatoes or crushed, and diced as well.
    • Tomato paste - For concentrated flavor and body.
    • Nutmeg - Classic in Bolognese, adds warmth and depth.
    • Milk - Traditionally includes whole milk, added for its ability to tenderize the meat, mellow the acidity of tomatoes, and give the sauce a rich, velvety, and complex flavor and texture.
    • Red pepper flakes - Optional kick of heat; adjust to taste.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Bison Bolognese Meat Sauce|AFoodCentricLife.com
    Chopped carrots, onion, and celery on marble counter.

    Chef's tip on tomatoes - High-quality canned tomatoes make the best base for this sauce. I like a mix of crushed or whole tomatoes plus diced for texture. If you can find certified San Marzano tomatoes, they're worth it for their natural sweetness, fewer seeds, and low acidity, but good canned plum or whole peeled tomatoes work well too.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Ground meat - If bison isn't available, substitute ground beef, turkey, or chicken. Choose 85-90% lean for best flavor.
    • Dairy-free option - Use diluted canned coconut milk in place of whole milk. It adds richness without dairy (and won't taste "coconut-y" once simmered).
    • Wine substitute - Replace the white wine with chicken or beef broth plus a splash of white wine vinegar or lemon juice for brightness.

    Chef's Tip - Cooking with Ground Bison
    Bison is naturally leaner than beef, which means it cooks faster and can dry out if overdone. For the best results, brown it lightly rather than cooking it until completely dry, then let it finish gently simmering in the sauce. The slow simmer keeps the meat tender and allows the flavors to meld without losing moisture.

    How to Make Bison Bolognese

    Start by cooking the vegetables, garlic and herbs until soft in a tablespoon of olive oil. Use a heavy pot for even heat distribution like a 5 ½ quart Dutch oven or other heavy pot. Next, add the ground bison, breaking the meat up with a wooden spoon. Cook the bison until still a bit pink (it will finish during simmering).

    Next, add tomatoes, dried Italian seasoning, bay leaf, and red pepper flakes. Stir and scrape any small pieces off the bottom of the pan. Add the milk and simmer.

    Bison Bolognese Meat Sauce|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Simmer to Develop Flavor

    To develop rich flavor and thick texture, simmer your sauce at least one hour, and if possible, two. The simmering sauce will fill the house with wonderful fragrance. Everyone will be asking when dinner will be ready.

    Another tip for creating a delicious sauce, add a Parmesan rind to the simmering sauce and let it melt in. It adds a fantastic savory flavor. Before serving, fish out what is left and discard.

    Bison Bolognese Meat Sauce|AFoodCentricLife.com

    If you need to stretch the sauce quantity to feed more mouths, add a can of tomato sauce. If you want it thicker, add a two tablespoons of tomato paste. Too thick? Thin with a little water.

    A gray stoneware bowl of pasta with meat sauce and a fork, parmesan cheese on the side.

    Serving Suggestions

    What pasta goes best with Bison Bolognese? Traditionally, Bolognese is served with wide noodles like pappardelle or tagliatelle, but it's also excellent with penne, gnocchi, or polenta. Be sure to top with a sprinkle of Parmesan cheese.

    For low carb or Paleo eaters, use zucchini noodles, cassava noodles, or spaghetti squash.

    Storage and Freezing

    • Refrigerator: Store cooled bolognese in an airtight container for up to 4 days. Reheat gently on the stovetop, adding a splash of broth or water if the sauce has thickened.
    • Freezer: This sauce freezes beautifully. Portion into containers or freezer bags, label, and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before reheating.
    • Pro Tip: Freeze in single-serving portions for easy weeknight meals - just add to hot pasta or polenta for a quick dinner. Thaw the sauce first, of course.

    Recipe FAQs

    What's the difference between bison and beef Bolognese?

    Bison is leaner than beef, so the sauce is a bit lighter but still rich and hearty. Cooking it gently in the tomato sauce keeps the meat tender and moist.

    Can I make this dairy-free?

    Yes. Substitute canned coconut milk for the half & half. It adds creaminess without dairy, and the flavor blends seamlessly into the sauce.

    Do I have to use wine in Bolognese?

    No. White wine adds depth and brightness, but you can use broth with a splash of white wine vinegar or lemon juice for acidity.

    More Great Pasta Sauce Recipes

    If you love this Bison Bolognese, try one of my other hearty pasta sauces. From rich, beef short rib ragu to weeknight favorites that freeze beautifully for quick meals.

    • Pot full of homemade marinara.
      Easy Pasta Sauce With Tomato Sauce
    • roasted tomato marinara
      The Best Roasted Tomato Sauce
    • mushroom marinara pasta sauce
      Mushroom Tomato Sauce

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you enjoyed this bison bolognese, please leave me a comment. I enjoy hearing from you! And the comments help others readers as well.

    📖 Recipe

    Bison Bolognese Meat SauceAFoodCentricLife.com

    Bison Bolognese Meat Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Lean ground bison updates this classic, long-simmered sauce with rich flavor. Serve over your choice of pasta, zucchini noodles or spaghetti squash for a low carb dinner. Extra freezes great, so if you have time, double the batch. You can substitute ground beef for the bison. Got time? Simmer up to 2 hours.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 6 to 8
    Calories 361 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 cup finely chopped onion ½ of a large
    • 1 cup finely chopped celery 3 ribs
    • 1 cup finely chopped carrot 2-3
    • 2-3 large cloves garlic finely chopped
    • 2 teaspoons dried Italian herb blend or use basil, oregano, thyme, rosemary
    • 1 pound ground bison 10% fat
    • ¾ cup dry white wine optional
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 28 ounce can whole or crushed tomatoes see note below for fresh tomatoes
    • 1 15 ounce can diced tomatoes
    • 1 6 ounce can tomato paste
    • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg or more
    • 1 large bay leaf
    • 1 cup half and half or canned coconut milk
    • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes (pizza pepper)

    Instructions
     

    Cook the Vegetables

    • To a large heavy pot (5 quart) over medium heat, add olive oil. When oil is hot add the onion, celery and carrot. Turn heat down to medium low and cook the vegetables slowly until soft, about 3-5 minutes. Stir occasionally. Add the garlic and dried Italian herbs and cook 1 minute longer.

    Add Meat and Continue

    • Add the ground bison and cook, breaking it up with a wooden spoon. Cook until it is no longer pink, about 5-7 minutes. Add the wine and cook until wine is reduced, 3-4 minutes. Add salt and pepper, then stir in the tomato paste and your tomatoes. Add nutmeg, bay leaf and milk. Turn the heat up and bring sauce almost to a boil, then turn down to low and cover.

    Simmer for Flavor

    • Simmer sauce 2 hours, stirring occasionally, until thick and rich. Serve over pasta or noodles of choice. Extra sauce freezes well.

    Notes

    For Fresh Tomatoes
    To substitute fresh tomatoes for canned, start by peeling the tomatoes. Bring a large pot of water to a boil. Set up an ice bath by filling a large bowl with half ice and cold water. Slice a small X into the bottom of the tomato (to make peeling easier). When water is boiling, place a few tomatoes at a time into the water for 1 minute, then plunge immediately into the ice bath. Tomato skins should peel right off. 
    With a sharp paring knife, cut out the core. When all tomatoes are peeled, pulse in a food processor or blender to break them up into a sauce. You should get approximately 4 cups of total diced tomatoes. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 361kcalCarbohydrates: 19gProtein: 18gFat: 22gSaturated Fat: 9gCholesterol: 68mgSodium: 306mgPotassium: 1092mgFiber: 5gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 5998IUVitamin C: 41mgCalcium: 112mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Coconut Shrimp Curry (Quick Dinner)

    08/29/2017 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    quick coconut curry shrimp

    Coconut shrimp curry is one of those dishes that feels special but is easy enough for any weeknight. Tender shrimp cook in minutes, nestled in a creamy coconut milk sauce infused with curry spices. The result is a golden, fragrant dish you can serve over rice or with warm flatbread. It's faster and better than takeout.

    Orangey colored coconut curry shrimp in a bowl.

    When I need dinner on the table quickly, shrimp are always a go-to - they cook in minutes and take on bold flavors beautifully. In this Thai-inspired coconut shrimp curry with coconut milk creates a rich, dairy-free sauce that's golden from curry powder and fragrant with ginger and garlic. A squeeze of lime juice at the end brightens everything up, balancing the creamy, spiced coconut sauce.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Coconut Shrimp Curry

    • Quick-cooking shrimp - Shrimp cook fast, making this curry a true weeknight win.
    • Creamy coconut milk sauce - Rich and velvety, with no dairy required.
    • Golden spice blend - Curry powder, ginger, and garlic give it warm flavor and a beautiful golden color.
    • Skip takeout - This dish is simple to make in minutes!

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Coconut milk - Use canned full-fat coconut milk for the richest, creamiest sauce.
    • Curry powder - A blend of spices giving the dish its golden color and warm flavor.
    • Onion - Adds sweetness and depth as the base of the sauce.
    • Coconut oil - Complements the coconut milk and adds a subtle layer of flavor.
    • Garlic - Fresh cloves bring bold, savory notes to the sauce.
    • Ginger - Finely grated fresh ginger or a spoonful of ginger paste adds zing and warmth.
    • Shrimp - Large raw shrimp, preferably wild.
    • Cilantro (optional) - A sprinkle of chopped fresh cilantro adds color and a bright, herbal finish.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Chef's Tip: Why Choose Wild Shrimp
    Shrimp is the most popular seafood in the U.S., but about 90% is imported and only a tiny fraction is inspected. Farmed shrimp often raise concerns over antibiotics, pesticides, and environmental impact. Wild-caught shrimp, on the other hand, are cleaner, more sustainable, and far better in flavor. When possible, choose wild shrimp.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Spice it up - If you like more heat, add a pinch of cayenne, a sprinkle of red chili flakes
    • Curry paste swap - Use 1½-2 tablespoons red Thai curry paste instead of curry powder for a bolder, spicier flavor.
    • Milder flavor - Use leeks instead of onion for a milder, sweeter flavor

    Chef's Tip: Understanding Shrimp Sizes
    Shrimp are sold by count per pound. Jumbo sizes like 16-20 or 13-15 mean there are that many shrimp in a pound. Smaller shrimp (21-25) cook faster and are less expensive. Buy shell-on when possible - the shell protects the meat. Peel and devein yourself for best results. Short on time? Pre-peeled and deveined shrimp are a fine shortcut.

    Raw shrimp peeled and cleaned on a rimmed baking sheet.

    Thawing Shrimp the Right Way

    Most shrimp are flash frozen at harvest, often sold IQF (individually quick frozen). Fresh-looking shrimp at the market are usually thawed from frozen.

    • Quick thaw method: Place shrimp in a sealed bag and submerge in cold water, changing the water every 30 minutes until thawed (about 45 minutes depending on size).
    • Best thaw method: Thaw overnight in the refrigerator on a rimmed baking sheet to catch liquid.
    creamy coconut shrimp with curry.

    How to Make Coconut Shrimp Curry

    Shrimp cook quickly and turn tender when simmered in spiced coconut milk, so have everything prepped before you start. Make ahead: You can whisk the sauce ingredients together and chop the onion, garlic, and ginger ahead of time. When ready to cook, dinner comes together in minutes.

    1. Mix the sauce - Whisk together the coconut milk, curry powder, and salt until smooth. (You can also shake it in a jar with a lid.)
    2. Prep the aromatics - Chop the onion. Mince or grate the garlic and ginger.
    3. Cook the base - In a large skillet, warm coconut oil over medium heat. Cook the onion until softened, then stir in the garlic and ginger for the last minute.
    4. Simmer the shrimp - Add the shrimp and the coconut milk mixture. Simmer just a few minutes until the shrimp are opaque and cooked through.
    5. Finish and serve - Taste and adjust seasoning, then garnish with cilantro if desired.

    Chef's Tip: If your prep is done in advance, the cooking itself takes only a few minutes.

    Chef's Tip: How to Cook Shrimp Perfectly
    Shrimp cook in just a few minutes, and the smaller they are the faster they cook. The biggest mistake is leaving them in too long. They're done when they turn pink, opaque, and the grayish, translucent areas are gone. At that point, pull them off the heat right away - even a minute too long can make them rubbery.

    A bowl of coconut curry shrimp served over rice with snap peas.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve the shrimp and creamy coconut curry sauce over white jasmine rice, nutty brown rice, quinoa, or a lighter base like cauliflower rice. Garnish with chopped cilantro or green onion, and add a squeeze of fresh lime juice to brighten the flavors. For balance, pair it with a simple tossed green salad or a quick vegetable side like simple blanched green beans.

    Storage & Freezing

    • Refrigerate: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat gently on the stovetop over medium-low heat until warmed through - avoid overcooking the shrimp.
    • Freezing: Not recommended. Shrimp tend to become rubbery when frozen and reheated, and the coconut sauce can separate. This dish is best enjoyed fresh.

    Recipe FAQs

    What kind of coconut milk should I use?

    Use canned full-fat coconut milk for the richest, creamiest sauce. Light coconut milk works, but the sauce won't be as velvety. Avoid cartons of coconut beverage, they're too thin.

    Can I use chicken instead of shrimp?

    Yes. Boneless chicken breast or thighs work well. Cut chicken into bite-sized pieces and simmer longer until fully cooked before adding the sauce.

    Can I use frozen shrimp?

    Yes. Most shrimp are sold frozen and thawed at the market. Buy frozen shrimp to keep on hand, then thaw in the refrigerator overnight or in a sealed bag under cold water for about 45 minutes.

    More Recipes With Shrimp

    Quick cooking shrimp make a fast dinner for buys weeks! Here are other shrimp recipes to try.

    • Grilled shrimp on bamboo sticks on a white platter with chimchurri sauce.
      Shrimp Skewers (Grilled or Oven)
    • baked lemon shrimp scampi
      Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi
    • Thai shrimp soup called Tom Yum in bowls with shrimp, jalapenos, cilantro, and limes.
      Shrimp Tom Yum Soup
    • Jalapeno mint shrimp.
      Grilled Tequila Lime Shrimp

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make coconut shrimp curry, please leave a comment. I love to hear from you. Comments also help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Coconut Shrimp Curry

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy, quick shrimp curry takes just minutes to get dinner on the table. Serve over rice and add a green vegetable such as sliced snow peas or a green salad. See ingredient list for Thai curry paste swap.
    5 from 4 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 6 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 16 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine Indian
    Servings 4
    Calories 470 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 cups canned coconut milk
    • 2 ½ teaspoons curry powder mild or hot
    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin coconut oil
    • ⅓ cup onion, finely chopped yellow, or white
    • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped or zested
    • 1 ½ teaspoons ginger finely grated or ginger paste
    • 1 ½ pounds raw peeled deveined shrimp 21-25 size
    • 1-2 tablespoons chopped fresh cilantro optional

    Optional swap for curry powder

    • 1 ½-2 tablespoons red Thai curry paste

    Instructions
     

    • Whisk together the coconut milk and curry powder (or curry paste) until smooth. You can also put it in a blender on low speed or shake well in a large jar. 
    • Warm the coconut oil over medium heat in a large saute or fry pan large enough to hold all of the shrimp in one layer. Add the onion and cook, stirring until softened, about 2 minutes. Add the garlic and ginger, cook about 30 seconds longer.
    • Add the shrimp to the pan, laying them flat in a single layer. Cook until pink on one side, 1-2 minutes, then turn shrimp over and pour in the spiced coconut curry milk.
      Bring the pan to a simmer, place a lid on top and turn heat to low. Cook until shrimp are firm and pink on both sides, another 5 minutes depending on the size of the shrimp.  Serve sprinkled with chopped cilantro if desired and a squeeze of lime juice.

    Notes

    When shrimp are cooked, taste the curry sauce to be sure the raw flavor of the curry powder is gone.  If not, remove shrimp and keep warm, and simmer the sauce another 1-2 minutes, this will thicken the sauce as well.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 470kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 38gFat: 33gSaturated Fat: 28gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 274mgSodium: 297mgPotassium: 845mgFiber: 4gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 222IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 152mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Easy Cream of Asparagus Soup

    03/22/2023 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    Pot of cream of asparagus soup ready to serve.

    Looking for a light and delicious soup to add to your spring or Easter menu? Look no further than this vibrant green cream of asparagus soup! Whether you want a vegan, dairy-free soup option or the richness of heavy cream, this soup is easy to make. Make it ahead of time to save time, in only 30 minutes. Don't forget to check out my list of fun and delicious garnishes to take your soup to the next level.

    Bright green and creamy asparagus soup in a gray pot with garnishes.

    Asparagus is the quintessential spring vegetable and I am completely crazy about asparagus and so happy when the beautiful green spears arrive at the store. If you've never made cream of asparagus soup, it is so delicious and easy, you must try it.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    It's that time of year! Asparagus season is the best time to make cream of asparagus soup and all things asparagus.

    • A simple soup with simple ingredients.
    • Easy instructions, finished in a blender
    • Serve warm or chilled
    • Tastes terrific, beautiful color, customizable with garnish options.
    • Make it a day or two ahead.

    Recipe Ingredients

    What are the ingredients needed to make this creamy asparagus soup? So simple!

    Ingredients for asparagus soup on the counter in prep bowls.
    • Asparagus: Choose bright green, fresh asparagus stalks with tight tips or heads, (usually at the market in a little water). A little thicker is better than pencil thin.
    • Cooking fat: Use unsalted dairy butter, a good plant-based butter like this one, or olive oil.
    • Onion: Go with white onion for mild sweet flavor to allow the asparagus to shine. Brown onions or yellow onions still work fine.
    • Garlic: A good place for fresh garlic, zest it with a microplane zester so it melts in.
    • Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme is best but dried works as well. Use about ½ - ⅓ as much as fresh.
    • Broth: Chicken broth (low sodium or homemade) or homemade vegetable broth.
    • Cream: Using canned full-fat coconut milk keeps it non-dairy. If you prefer, use dairy heavy cream. Both work great.
    • Lemon: Fresh squeezed lemon juice lifts or brightens the flavor of asparagus soup.

    See the recipe card for measurements plus salt and white or black pepper.

    Chef's Tip: How to store asparagus. When you get asparagus home, trim a little off the bottom and stand the bundles in a tall container with an inch of water in the bottom to keep the ends moist. Treat asparagus like flowers. Cover loosely with plastic wrap until ready to use. Alternatively, wet a paper towel with water and wrap the ends, then place in a plastic bag. Asparagus will last a couple of days stored this way.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Can I make cream of asparagus soup without cream?

    Yes, you can make it without cream. For an asparagus soup without cream, swap full fat canned coconut milk for heavy cream. And truly, it does not taste like coconut! This swap works for other cream-based soups too.

    Broth options

    While I use chicken broth, if you're vegan or vegetarian, cream of asparagus soup is a great place to use homemade vegetable broth. It's easy to make in short time and the flavor is far superior to canned or boxed stuff.

    Recipe Instructions

    Chopped asparagus in glass bowl ready to cook.
    Step 1: Trim asparagus spears of woody tough ends (and discard), trim off the tips and chop the spears.
    Cooked asparagus pieces chilling in an ice batch.
    Step: 2: Briefly cook asparagus in a large pot of boiling salted water, 2 minutes (blanching). Immediately remove asparagus to ice water and chill, then drain. Separate enough tips for garnish and set aside.

    Chef's Tip: The cold water ice bath stops the cooking process and sets the color of the asparagus to keep the soup a bright green.

    Cooking onion and herbs for the base of asparagus soup.
    Step 3: Melt butter and cook the onion, garlic, and herbs.
    Adding cooked asparagus to pot to simmer for soup.
    Step 4: Add asparagus pieces and rest of tips to the pot.
    Adding the broth and coconut milk to the pot.
    Step 5: Add broth and milk, then simmer a few minutes.
    Cooked asparagus with liquids in the blender for pureeing.
    Step 6: Puree in a high-speed blender. The soup is ready.
    Bright green asparagus soup pureed in a blender container, ready to serve.

    Blender Tips

    If you you don't have a regular blender, use an immersion blender to puree asparagus soup. Place the pot in the sink to reduce splatter. Remember to be extra careful when blending hot liquids.

    Asparagus sou shooters for appetizers.

    Serving Suggestions: Great Garnishes

    Here's a list of terrific garnishes for cream of asparagus soup, for both dairy and non-dairy diners. Be sure to serve lemon wedges alongside. One more thing, this asparagus soup recipe is delightful served either hot, at room temperature, or chilled. A slice of crusty bread is good alongside.

    • First and foremost, the reserved asparagus tips (the best part).
    • Chopped herbs such fresh dill, chives, parsley, or fennel fronds.
    • Garlicky croutons (can be made GF and DF if needed).
    • Crisp crumbled bacon.
    • Chopped or grated hard boiled egg.
    • Grated Parmesan cheese.
    • A dollop of sour cream (dairy or non-dairy), or creme fraiche.
    • Homemade toasted pumpkin seeds add a nice crunch.
    • A drizzle of good lemon olive oil (or basil).
    • Fresh lemon zest.
    • Sliced green onion.
    • Cold tiny bay shrimp.

    Here's a super fun serving idea for a get together appetizer: asparagus soup shooters! Serve them chilled.

    Beautiful green asparagus soup in a white bowl with tasty garnishes ready to eat.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I freeze cream of asparagus soup?

    While many sites say you can freeze for 3-6 months, soups with cream or milk don't freeze well and tend to separate upon thawing. They can become grainy and lose their taste. I don't recommend freezing asparagus soup. If you want to try freezing, try re-heating gently on the stovetop and briefly blending again.

    How long does cream of asparagus soup last in the fridge?

    Cream of asparagus lasts 3-4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. For more information check out this food chart from the FDA.

    Is cream of asparagus soup healthy?

    Asparagus packs a dose of vitamins C, E and K, folate and minerals like zinc, manganese, and selenium. Plus, asparagus is anti-inflammatory and a source of glutathione, the master antioxidant.

    Eating asparagus also gives you inulin, a fiber that acts as a prebiotic, providing a feast for the good bacteria in our gut that help with digestion. But of course, there is all of the fat in cream or coconut milk to weigh in the balance. Read more at this link.

    What can I serve with cream of asparagus soup?

    Cream of asparagus soup goes with just about anything. Try it as a starter before a ham, pork roast, roast chicken, or beef dinner. Serve it alone as a soup shooter for an appetizer. It makes a nice light meal with a grilled cheese sandwich.

    Bright green asparagus soup in a white bowl on a bloue plate on the dinner table.

    More Creamy Soup Recipes

    For another creamy soup recipe, try creamy cauliflower soup, roasted red pepper, or creamy broccoli.

    • Roasted cauliflower soup
      Creamy Cauliflower Soup with Roasted Garlic
    • roasted red pepper soup
      Roasted Red Pepper Soup (sheet pan recipe)
    • cream of broccoli soup with sausage
      Cream of Broccoli Soup (dairy free vegan option)
    • creamy cauliflower soup
      Curried Cauliflower Soup

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make cream of asparagus soup, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Asparagus soup | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Cream of Asparagus Soup

    Sally Cameron
    Vivid green, this creamy asparagus soup is rich and easy to make. Use coconut milk (it doesn't taste like coconut) for no-dairy, or dairy heavy cream. Serve with lemon wedges if desired. See recipe notes for garnish ideas. Soup keeps 3-4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 12 minutes mins
    Cook Time 18 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 12-ounce servings
    Calories 268 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large pot or Dutch Oven
    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 bunches fresh asparagus 2 pounds
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil or butter unsalted dairy butter or unsalted plant butter
    • ½ medium onion ¾ cup, chopped
    • 2 large garlic cloves finely chopped or zested
    • 2 teaspoons chopped fresh thyme leaves (or tarragon) or ¾ teaspoon dried
    • 1 ½ cups low sodium broth Chicken or vegetable
    • 1 cup canned coconut milk or dairy cream
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper I use white pepper

    Optional Garnishes (non-dairy and dairy)

    • 4 tablespoons finely grated Parmesan cheese
    • 4 tablespoons sour cream or creme fraiche
    • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh dill, parsley, or chives
    • 4 pieces crisply crumbled bacon
    • 2-4 hardboiled eggs chopped or grated
    • 4 tablespoons toasted pumpkin seeds
    • 4 teaspoons lemon olive oil
    • 1 cup garlicky croutons DF or GF

    Instructions
     

    Set up

    • Fill a large pot (5 quarts) three-quarters full with cold water and bring to a boil over high heat. Fill a medium bowl half full of ice, then fill with cold water. This creates an ice bath. While water is coming to a boil, prep the asparagus.

    Blanch and chill

    • Chop the tough ends off of the bottom of the asparagus spears. Trim off the tips, then chop the rest of the spears into 1" pieces. Drop all of the asparagus into boiling salted water and cook for 2 minutes (this is called blanching). Strain asparagus through a sieve into the sink and add the asparagus immediately to the ice batch to stop the cooking process. Chill until cold then drain again. Separate out enough asparagus tips for garnish (12-20 pieces).

    Make the soup

    • In the same pan, cook onion in olive oil or butter over medium to medium heat until soft, about 4 minutes. Add garlic, thyme, salt and pepper and cook 1 minute longer. Add asparagus, broth and coconut milk. Simmer for 7-10 minutes for flavors to blend. Puree in a blender until smooth. Depending on the capacity of your blender container, you may need to do it in two batches. Adjust seasoning to taste with more salt and pepper if needed.
      Serve asparagus soup hot, warm, or chilled with cooked asparagus tips and other preferred garnishes.

    Notes

    • For broth, homemade really shines in soup, especially vegetable broth. Make this easy homemade vegetable broth recipe ahead of time and freeze. The Instant Pot chicken broth recipe is also easy to make ahead and freeze. 
    • Garnish ideas: Chopped fresh herbs like dill, parsley, chives, or chervil, crisp crumbled bacon, grated or chopped hard boiled eggs, a drizzle of lemon olive oil, grated Parmesan cheese, garlicky croutons, a dollop of sour cream or creme fraiche, even cold bay shrimp. 
    • Optional garnishes are not figured into the nutrition calculation. 
    Dietary note: People with histamine intolerance should be fine enjoying this soup, as long as they're ok with the coconut milk. Skip the Parmesan cheese though, aged cheese is high histamine.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 268kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 8gFat: 22gSaturated Fat: 14gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gSodium: 332mgPotassium: 722mgFiber: 6gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 1750IUVitamin C: 17mgCalcium: 78mgIron: 6mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Homemade Italian Dressing

    08/09/2022 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Golden Italian salad dressing in a jar with a silver whisk.

    Whether you are tossing green salads or dressing a cold pasta salad, a great homemade dressing recipe makes the most of what you're making. Flavorful and tangy, make this easy homemade Italian dressing (aka Italian vinaigrette) in your kitchen. No packets, with simple, healthy ingredients, so make your own salad dressing.

    Golden Italian salad dressing in a jar with a silver whisk.

    As a kid, my job before dinner was making the Italian dressing. Grab a Good Seasons packet, add oil and vinegar to the lines on the cruet, add the dry seasoning packet and give it a good shake. It was my favorite dressing, which is why I am excited to share this recipe with you. The old recipe made new (and healthier). It's delicious!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You Should Make Homemade Italian Dressing

    • Easy recipe - Add ingredients to a jar and shake.
    • Clean dressing - No preservatives or poor quality ingredients, you control it.
    • Simple ingredients - You probably have the ingredients already.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Italian dressing ingredients.
    • Oil: The best choice for delicious dressing is extra-virgin olive oil. Avocado oil works too but doesn't have the flavor.
    • Vinegar: Vinegar gives Italian dressing brightness and tang. Choose champagne, white wine vinegar, red wine vinegar, or apple cider vinegar. All work well in Italian salad dressing.
    • Parmesan cheese: The king of cheeses, for that savory, salty, umami flavor. A get the good stuff, the parmigiano-reggiano.
    • Mustard: Best choice is Dijon mustard. Use a creamy style.
    • Dried herbs: Dried Italian seasoning blend is terrific, but you can use just basil or oregano. Italian blend is usually a combination of thyme, marjoram, basil, oregano, sage and rosemary. Use what you have.
    • Powdered seasoning: You need garlic powder and onion powder for punch and power.
    • A touch of sweetness: Sugar or monk fruit blend, honey, maple, keto simple syrup, or agave syrup. You use a tiny amount but it's just enough.

    Please see the recipe card for all measurements.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Swap some whole grain Dijon for more texture and flavor.
    • Use a flavored olive oil, like extra virgin lemon olive oil or a basil extra virgin olive oil.
    • Use a finely zested fresh garlic cloves instead of the garlic powder.
    • For zesty Italian dressing, use a little dried red pepper flakes (pizza pepper).
    • Keep it low sodium by skipping salt (or using just a pinch) and be careful with the Parmesan. 1 tablespoon has 76mg of sodium.
    • For a cheesy flavor but no cheese (vegan or non-dairy), add a little nutritional yeast. It provides that cheesy flavor without the cheese.
    • If the dressing is too tangy, a little agave nectar, a bit of sugar, monk fruit or maple syrup to tame the tang.
    • If you need a low histamine dressing, skip the Parmesan and try it with ACV or white vinegar.

    Chef's Tip: For finely grated fresh parmesan cheese or garlic, use a microplane zester. It's a must-have, inexpensive kitchen tool. Use it for zesting citrus, raw garlic, chocolate, nuts, whole spices like nutmeg, and more.

    Grated Parmesan cheese with microplane zester.

    How to Make Italian Dressing

    Make the dressing about 30 minutes ahead of time for the best flavor. This allows the dried herbs to rehydrate and release their flavor.

    Place all ingredients into a jar or bottle with a tight lid and shake well. For larger batches, use a blender.

    golden olive oil in a cruet.

    Chef's Note: Why make your own dressing? Grocery store bottled brands of dressing often use soybean oil or canola oil (rapeseed oil). The problem? These oils are low quality, unhealthy oils, industrially processed with chemicals and solvents, and mostly genetically modified (GMO). No thanks.

    Italian dressing in small pitcher.

    Serving Suggestions

    Of course, use homemade Italian salad dressing to dress a green salad, but it works great over a cold pasta salad. It's an excellent marinade for chicken breasts and shrimp before grilling. Try it tossed with cooked green beans or grilled vegetables. It's multipurpose, one to always have in your recipe arsenal. Store any extras in an airtight container in the refrigerator. It lasts a week.

    Recipe FAQs

    What oil is best for homemade dressing?

    The best oil is extra virgin olive oil or unrefined avocado oil. Run from "vegetable oil" as its usually highly processed soybean oil. If it's in your pantry, toss it. Healthier oils are naturally extracted or pressed and made without chemical alteration. Another highly processed oil not in my pantry is canola oil (rapeseed oil). There are delicious and healthy alternatives.

    What's the difference between Italian dressing and vinaigrette?

    Really, it's just semantics. They are basically the same thing. Sometimes in general, a vinaigrette is more fluid and might simply be oil and vinegar and a dressing might be creamier, but it depends on the ingredients. Adding Dijon mustard makes a vinaigrette creamy as it's a natural emulsifier.

    Can you leave homemade Italian dressing on the counter?

    Not really. Homemade Italian dressing is best refrigerated, and a must if it contains Parmesan cheese. Refrigerate for food safety reasons.

    More Dressing Recipes

    I have many delicious salad dressing and vinaigrettes recipe on this site. Some are separate and some are within salad recipes. Check out the salad category and you'll find strawberry vinaigrette, orange vinaigrette, and more.

    • A bowl of homemade caesar dressing with spoon.
      Caesar Salad Dressing Without Anchovies
    • creamy tahini salad dressing
      Creamy Lemon Tahini Salad Dressing
    • Chicken blueberry salad
      Blueberry Vinaigrette
    • chinese chicken salad
      Healthy Chicken Salad Recipe with Ginger Salad Dressing

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this Italian dressing recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Golden Italian salad dressing in a jar with a silver whisk.

    Homemade Italian Salad Dressing

    Sally Cameron
    Whether you are tossing green salads or dressing a cold pasta salad, a great homemade dressing recipe makes the most of what you're making. Flavorful and tangy, make this easy homemade Italian salad dressing (aka Italian vinaigrette) in your kitchen. 
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course condiment, dresssing
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 16 Yield 1 cup
    Calories 82 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • ⅔ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • 3 tablespoons champagne or white wine vinegar sub apple cider vinegar
    • 1 tablespoon very finely grated Parmesan cheese
    • ¾ teaspoon Dijon mustard
    • ¾ teaspoon dried Italian seasoning blend sub basil, oregano,
    • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
    • ⅛ teaspoon sea salt
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ⅛ teaspoon sugar or monk fruit blend sub honey, maple, keto simple syrup, agave
    • 1 pinch red chili flakes (pizza pepper)

    Instructions
     

    • Add all ingredients to a jar and shake well and is a bowl and whisk.
    • For a larger batch use a blender.

    Notes

    Besides salad, this is an excellent marinade for chicken breasts and shrimp before grilling. Try it tossed with cooked green beans or grilled vegetables. It's multipurpose, one to always have in your recipe arsenal. Store any extras in an airtight container.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1tablespoonCalories: 82kcalCarbohydrates: 0.2gProtein: 0.1gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 0.3mgSodium: 27mgPotassium: 4mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 0.04gVitamin A: 6IUVitamin C: 0.02mgCalcium: 5mgIron: 0.1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Tart Crust (grain-free gluten-free)

    11/24/2013 by Sally Cameron 51 Comments

    Gluten free almond tart crust

    Here is a tart crust recipe that works for your favorite fillings, whether pumpkin, chocolate, or even a savory goat cheese. It's made with simple ingredients, a blend of almond flour, coconut flour, butter and a little sugar. It's naturally gluten-free and grain-free too. Press the tart crust mix into a tart pan with your fingers, bake and fill. No rolling of pastry! Bake it a day ahead of filling to save time. It's so easy.

    A golden almond flour tart crust ready to be filled.

    If you have not made a press-in crust like this, I think you'll love it like I do. No pastry dough to roll out and mess with. It takes about 15 minutes to assemble plus baking time. Combining almond flour and coconut flour for a cookie-like crust makes for a perfect gluten free tart crust. Fill it with my spiced pumpkin tart filling for Thanksgiving, a rich chocolate filling for Christmas, or other holidays and celebrations.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Almond Flour - Naturally gluten-free and rich in healthy fats, almond flour gives the crust a tender, buttery texture.
    • Coconut Flour - Highly absorbent and also gluten-free, coconut flour adds structure and helps the crust hold together without becoming dense.
    • Sugar - Light brown sugar adds a subtle caramel flavor.
    • Butter - Use unsalted butter for better control over flavor. Salted butter can throw off the balance.
    • Salt - Fine sea salt enhances the flavor of both the crust and the filling-don't skip it!

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For a vegan tart crust (or dairy-free), use a stick form (not in a tub) plant-based butter such as this.
    • For a savory tart crust: If you want to make a savory (not sweet) crust, please read my post for the cherry tomato tart with fresh basil leaves and the crust adjustments. I eliminated the sugar, added an egg yolk.
    Almond Coconut Crust|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Recipe Tools

    • 9 ½″ light metal tart pan with a removable bottom.
    • Half-sheet rimmed baking sheets. They have a raised edge, not flat like a cookie sheet (13″x 18″.) Buy them online from Amazon. Make sure they are heavy, not cheap. Heavy duty ones stand up to use without warping. Cheap ones warp. There are other brands too, just be sure they are heavy duty.
    • A silicone liner is on the baking sheet. It prevents the tart crust from sliding around as well as protects it from the direct heat of the oven. Find Silpat on Amazon and cooking supply stores.

    Recipe Instructions

    Almond flour and coconut flour in a bowl with a fork for mixing.

    Step 1: in a medium mixing bowl, mix the dry ingredients (flours) and sugar together with a fork.

    Testing cookie crust tart dough by squeezing in your hand.

    Step 2: Add in the melted butter and mix with a fork. When the mix looks evenly combined, squeeze a handful together. It should hold, like in the photo. The crust mix should feel moist. If not add a little more melted butter.

    Forming a gluten free tart crust by hand in a tart pan.

    Step 3: Create the tart shell, fuss a bit and take your time. It take about 12 minutes to assemble. 

    The time you take to make the crust perfect will be worth it. Pour the crust mix into the tart pan, distributing it evenly with your fingers. Work on the crust edge first. You want to create a strong, even edge.

    Push and pinch the crust mix into the edge of the tart pan with your fingers and thumbs. Work to build it up in layers and keep moving around the tart pan. It takes a little time. Keep working it. A nice sturdy edge will give strength to the tart when you cut it. 

    When you have a nice strong edge, pat the rest firmly into the bottom of the tart pan for the base (and don't poke holes). The bottom of a flat glass helps.

    A light g olden baked gluten-free tart shell  made with almond and coconut flour.

    Step 4: Place the tart pan on a sheet pan for support. Blind bake the tart crust util it is golden. Remove from the oven and cool prior to filling.

    Bake the tart crust in a 350° oven for approximately 15-17 minutes. Timing will vary with ovens. You want it to be a light golden brown. Remove and cool. Use with your filling of choice. If you are using my pumpkin filling, you will bake the tart a second time.

    Make Head Tips

    You can bake this easy gluten-free tart crust a day ahead. After baking and cooling, wrap it in the pan (for support) with plastic wrap. It's fine stored on the counter for a day.

    Serving Suggestions

    Here are the tart filling recipes I have created so far, both sweet and savory:

    • Cherry Tomato Tart
    • Chocolate Hazelnut Tart
    • Spiced Pumpkin Tart
    • Lemon meringue Tart

    Recipe FAQs

    Should I pre-bake (blind bake) the crust?

    After creating your tart crust, blind bake it, which means pre-bake it before filling. THis helps insure that the crust does not get soggy when filled and baked or filled with a no-bake filling.

    Can I make it dairy-free, too?

    Make the tart crust dairy-free or vegan using an unsalted plant-based butter in stick form, not tub form.

    What type of gluten-free flour is best for tart crust?

    Because there are many choices in gluten-free flours, there is not one right answer. For tart crusts, a blend of gluten-free flours is best to get the best attributes of each flour, such as proteins and starches. It also depends on if you're making a roll out pastry style crust or a press-in style crust.

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this tart crust, please comment and let me know how you liked it and how it worked for you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    Fingers forming an almond tart crust and building the edges.

    Gluten free tart crust (grain free too)

    Sally Cameron
    Using almond flour and coconut flour, this tart crust or pie crust is wheat-free and gluten-free. Fill with creamy spiced pumpkin, chocolate or a savory cheese and tomato filling.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 236 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9 ½" removable bottom tart pan (light colored)
    • Silpat or other non-slip liner optional
    • Half sheet size rimmed baking sheet

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ cups almond flour 6 ounces
    • ½ cup coconut flour 2 ounces
    • 2 tablespoons light brown sugar or natural granulated sugar
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted or plant-based butter
    • ¼ teaspoon salt

    Instructions
     

    Mix Crust

    • Pre-heat oven to 350° (177 C). In a medium bowl, mix almond flour, coconut flour, sugar and melted butter with a fork until blended, then blend until completely combined with your fingers. To test, squeeze a handful together. It should hold together and feel moist.

    Form Crust With Your Fingers

    • Pour the crust mix into the tart pan and distribute it evenly. Start by building the edges of the tart. With your fingers and thumbs, pinch and crimp the crust mix together to form a strong, fairly thick edge. Refer to the photos in the post for guidance. This will take 12-15 minutes. Don't hurry. It will be worth it.
    • Once you've created a strong edge, compress what is left of the crust mix into a firm base in the bottom of the tart pan with your hand or a flat bottom glass. Place the tart pan on a rimmed baking sheet. If you have a silicone liner, place it on the baking sheet first so the tart pan does not slide. If you don't have one, no problem. Just be careful with the unbaked tart crust.

    Bake Crust and Cool

    • Bake tart crust for 14-16 minutes, or until light golden brown. Timing will depend on your ovens. Cool and fill as desired.

    Notes

    I used Bobs Red Mill coconut flour and almond flour for this recipe

    Nutrition

    Calories: 236kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 6gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 23mgSodium: 96mgPotassium: 3mgFiber: 5gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 262IUCalcium: 47mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make Steamed Salmon

    03/25/2023 by Sally Cameron 47 Comments

    Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.

    Steamed salmon is one of the easiest and healthiest ways to prepare salmon-and it's ready in just 20 minutes. Steaming keeps the fish incredibly moist, tender, and flaky without any added fat or fuss. Whether you're making a quick dinner or planning ahead for meal prep, this simple method shows you how to steam salmon perfectly every time. Serve it hot, warm, or chilled with your favorite sauces, herbs, or grain bowls.

    A white oval platter of pink steamed salmon with lemons and herbs.

    Whether you're an experienced cook or new to the kitchen, steamed salmon is practically foolproof. It's a clean, simple cooking method that yields moist, flaky salmon every time. This steaming salmon works, skin-on or off, and adapts well to any seasoning. It's also ideal for meal prep: make extra and serve it chilled over salads or grain bowls later in the week. Steaming: it's for more than vegetables and rice!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Steamed Salmon

    Of all the ways I've cooked salmon-roasted, seared, grilled, poached, parchment-baked-steaming might be the easiest. And surprisingly delicious.

    • Fast & Foolproof - Steamed salmon cooks in minutes with no babysitting. Perfect for busy weeknights.
    • Versatile - Serve it hot, warm, or chilled.
    • Light, Clean & Healthy - Steaming locks in moisture without needing oil or butter.
    • Endlessly Adaptable - Pair it with your favorite sauces or just a squeeze of lemon.

    Follow these easy directions for how to skin salmon at home.

    What You'll Need

    Ingredients for steamed salmon on the counter.

    For the Steamed Salmon

    • Salmon - Wild salmon is the top choice for flavor and nutrition, but it's seasonal and not always easy to find. Good-quality frozen wild salmon is a great alternative. If opting for farmed, look for sustainably raised options.
    • Seasoning - Keep it simple: sea salt, freshly ground black pepper, and a little granulated garlic if you like. The clean flavor of steamed salmon doesn't need much.

    See the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    For the Steaming Liquid

    An aromatic steaming liquid gently infuses the salmon with subtle flavor-no marinade needed. Simply combine cold water with any of the following:

    • Fresh Lemon - Sliced or juiced for brightness.
    • Garlic - Lightly crushed cloves add mellow depth.
    • Herbs
      • Fresh: thyme, tarragon, parsley, bay leaves
      • Dried: dill, thyme, Italian seasoning, or Herbs de Provence
    • Aromatics - Add chopped leek, shallot, onion, or sliced fennel (or fennel fronds) for more complexity.
    • Wine (Optional) - A little dry white wine or vermouth adds a touch of acidity and elegance.

    Chef's Tip: Use what you have to create the steaming liquid. Always use lemon, garlic and some herbs, and add the other items if you have them.

    Substitutions and Variations

    What seasonings go well with steamed salmon? There are so many ways to change the flavor depending on your mood or what's in your pantry:

    • Seasoning Blends - Swap the basic salt and pepper for lemon pepper, everything but the bagel seasoning is great, my homemade smoky dry rub, or even a homemade taco seasoning blend for a fun twist.
    • No Wine? No Problem. - To steam salmon without wine, use vegetable broth, water with a generous splash of lemon juice, or a mix of both. You'll need enough liquid to just reach the bottom of the steamer basket.
    • Herb Swaps - If you're out of fresh herbs, substitute 1-2 teaspoons of dried herbs (like dill, thyme, or Italian seasoning) in the steaming liquid for subtle, aromatic flavor.

    Chef's Tip: How to buy salmon. Don't be shy at the fish counter-tell the fishmonger exactly what you want. Don't just take whatever they hand you (especially at today's prices). I always ask for center-cut salmon fillets. They're thicker, more even, and cook more consistently than thinner tail pieces. If what's in the case looks tired (not great), ask if they have any more in the back they can cut fresh for you. It's absolutely okay to be choosy-you're the customer. For the best choices in salmon, check out this salmon buying guide.

    If you love salmon, try this easy smoked salmon dip. It's a reader favorite on my website for good reason!

    How to Steam Salmon

    To get salmon ready for steaming, there's a little easy prep work.

    1) Skin the Salmon (or not)

    Either works, but here's the difference:

    • Skin-on salmon will turn rubbery when steamed (unlike when it's seared or grilled), so it's typically not something you'll want to eat. However, it does peel off easily after steaming if you leave it on.
    • Skinless salmon (deskinned) results in a cleaner, more refined presentation and allows you to remove the bloodline-that darker flesh that can have a stronger, more assertive flavor. I generally remove the skin and bloodline.

    If you prefer skinless fillets but don't want to do it yourself, ask your fishmonger to skin it for you. Or follow my step-by-step photos in this post to remove the salmon skin at home.

    2) Check for Pin Bones

    Before steaming, always check for pin bones-those fine, flexible bones that run through the fillet. Many grocery stores or fish counters remove them for you, but it's worth double-checking.

    Removing pin bones from raw salmon with pliers.

    To find them, gently run your fingers along the top and sides of the salmon. (Tip: slightly damp fingers make it easier to feel the bones.) If you find any, remove them with clean kitchen tweezers or a pair of needle-nose pliers. I keep a pair of small fly fishing pliers in my kitchen just for this-perfect for the job.

    Removing pin bones ensures a smoother texture and a more enjoyable eating experience-especially important if you're serving the salmon cold or flaked into a salad.

    The aromatic steaming liquid to steam salmon with herbs, lemon, and shallots.

    3) Seasoning & Steaming Setup

    Now it's time to season and set up for steaming. First, you'll need a large pot with a tight-fitting lid. I use a 5 ½-quart Le Creuset Dutch oven, but any similar-sized pot works. The key is a snug lid that traps steam efficiently.

    To hold the salmon above the steaming liquid, use a folding stainless steel steaming basket-it's simple, affordable, and fits in most pots. A silicone steamer basket is another great option (just make sure it opens flat). If you have a bamboo steamer or steam oven, those work fine too.

    A stainless stell folding steaming rack set into a pot of aromatic liquid for steaming fish.

    4) Steam Salmon Fillets

    What seasoning goes well with steamed salmon? Start with the basics: sea salt and freshly ground black pepper. I also like to add a touch of granulated garlic. Want to mix it up? Try lemon pepper or an "everything but the bagel" blend for something bolder.

    Salmon filets in a pot with lemon, herbs, shallots, ready for steaming.

    Chef's tip: If you have salmon fillets where there is one thinner end, fold it under to create a more evenly thick piece of fish.

    A folded of raw salmon to make a more even piece for cooking.

    To set up the steamer:

    • Add your steaming liquid ingredients (water, herbs, aromatics, etc.) to the pot.
    • Cover with the lid and bring to a boil over medium-high heat.
    • The water level should just reach the bottom of your steamer basket.

    Once boiling, reduce the heat to medium. Lightly spray the steamer basket with avocado oil spray or another neutral oil to prevent the salmon from sticking. Place the basket into the pot. When steam begins escaping the lid, carefully add the salmon fillets in a single layer.

    How long should you steam salmon?

    Steamed salmon typically takes about 8 minutes, depending on the thickness of the fillets. Thicker cuts may need 9-10 minutes, while thinner fillets could be done in 6-7.

    How do you know when steamed salmon is cooked?

    Salmon is done when:

    • The internal temperature reaches 145°F (per USDA guidelines).
    • The flesh turns a light pinkish-orange color.
    • It's firm to the touch, but not hard or dry.

    Chef's tip on temperature: Steamed salmon is typically done at an internal temperature between 140°F and 145°F. At 140°F, the center stays slightly soft and silky. At 145°F, it's fully opaque and firm, yet still moist. Choose the doneness that feels right for you-there's no one-size-fits-all when it comes to perfectly cooked salmon.

    When salmon is steamed, move it to plates for serving or cooling and refrigerating with a flexible fish spatula.

    Pale peachy colored salmon filets after steaming in the steamer basket.

    Serving Suggestions

    What are some side dishes that go well with steamed salmon? Serve salmon fillets with brown or white rice, or quinoa. For a vegetable, serve it with steamed or roast asparagus, basic broccolini, or simple French green beans.

    This steamed salmon recipe is terrific chilled and served atop a main course salad (like a salmon Caesar), or try steamed salmon in a classic South-of-France salad called a Nicoise (nee-swahz). It's fantastic in summer.

    Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.

    Sauce Ideas

    You can simply serve steamed salmon with lemon wedges, but there is so much more you can do. Here are sauce ideas for delicious salmon:

    • Quick creamy aioli: Mix together a little mayo, chopped fresh dill, fresh lemon juice, a little Dijon mustard sauce.
    • Creamy Citrus Mango Sauce
    • A dollop of fresh basil pesto (or thinned for a dressing)
    • A tropical pineapple-mango salsa
    • A Greek Tzatziki sauce made with Greek yogurt.
    • Traditional tomato salsa (great in summer).
    • An easy horseradish sauce (see this post for my recipe). Add some chives for color.
    • For an Asian accent, try a toasted sesame oil and soy sauce combination sprinkled with green onions.

    Leftovers and Storage

    Cooked steamed salmon lasts 3 days in the refrigerator, making it a pretty good choice for meal prep. It's just as delicious the next day. Store in an airtight container and be sure to label and date.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the white stuff on steamed salmon?

    It's a protein called albumin. It's liquid in the flesh and turns white (coagulates) upon cooking. Too much of it means your salmon might be over cooked. A little bit is normal. And it's totally safe to eat.

    Is steamed salmon healthy?

    Absolutely. Salmon is a high quality protein source, 34 grams in 6 ounces of raw weight salmon. Farmed vs. wild vary slightly. Salmon is a great source of heart-healthy omega-3 fats and selenium, important for DNA synthesis, thyroid hormone metabolism, and reproductive health. Plus, it's a rich source of B12. Read this terrific article for more information.

    What's the best way to cook salmon healthy?

    Steaming is one of the healthiest ways to cook a lot of things-including salmon. It doesn't require any added fat or oil, and it keeps the fish incredibly moist and tender. It's also a gentle cooking method that preserves the nutrients and natural flavor of the salmon. Serve it with a sprinkle of fresh chopped herbs herbs, a squeeze of lemon, or your favorite healthy sauce for a clean, satisfying meal.

    Great Sauce Recipes for Steamed Salmon

    Steamed salmon is mild and tender, making it the perfect canvas for bold, flavorful sauces. These are some of my favorites-fresh, vibrant, and easy to make. Whether you're serving your salmon hot or chilled, these sauces bring it to life.

    • A jar of salsa chimichurri of parsley, oregano, olive oil, onion, and vinegar.
      Argentinian Chimichurri Sauce (salsa chimichurri)
    • A bowl of cream Greek Tzatziki with dill and olive oil drizzle with raw veggies and crackers.
      Easy Tzatziki Recipe (Greek Yogurt Sauce)
    • tomatillo salsa verde
      Green Enchilada Sauce with Tomatillos
    • Citrus mango sauce
      Creamy Mango Sauce

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make steamed salmon, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.

    Simple Steamed Salmon

    Sally Cameron
    A fast, easy, and healthy recipe. Have dinner on the table in minutes. Serve salmon warm or chilled. Ideas for sauces are in the post with links to recipes.
    4.34 from 12 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 8 minutes mins
    Total Time 18 minutes mins
    Course Main Course, Salmon, Seafood
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 320 kcal

    Equipment

    • Steamer rack
    • Large pot or Dutch Oven

    Ingredients
      

    Steamed Salmon

    • 1 ¼ - 1 ½ pounds salmon filet cut into 4 equal pieces, skinned or not
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ½ teaspoon granulated garlic optional
    • 1 lemon for serving
    • avocado spray

    Steaming Liquid (use all of these or what you have)

    • 3-4 cups water
    • 2 large garlic cloves peeled and crushed
    • ½ bundle fresh Italian parsley long stems trimmed
    • 1 lemon sliced
    • 1 bay leaf
    • 1 cup white wine or white vermouth optional
    • 1 handful fresh thyme sprigs or 2 teaspoons dried thyme
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 shallot, sliced or ½ small white onion or leek

    Instructions
     

    Prep the Salmon Fillets

    • Cut salmon filet into four equal pieces. Skin the salmon or leave it on for removal after steaming. Sprinkle with salt, pepper and garlic.

    Make the Steaming Liquid

    • Add water and all of the rest of the steaming liquid ingredients to the pot. It should come just to the bottom of your steaming rack. Bring to a boil with lid on, then turn down to a simmer for 5 minutes to infuse a bit.

    Steam Salmon Fillets

    • Spray steamer rack with non-stick spray. Add a few extra lemon slices and herbs to the rack and place the salmon filets on tops.
      Lift the rack into the steaming pot. The liquid level (about 1-inch) should come just to the bottom of the rack.) Steam salmon for about 8 minutes or until salmon reaches 140°F-145ºF internally when measured with a digital thermometer. Timing will depend on the thickness of your salmon. 
      Serve warm or chilled with sauce of choice. Ideas and links below. 

    Notes

    Salmon buying notes: Wild salmon is the best choice but not always available due to seasons (and price). For the best choices in salmon, check out this salmon buying guide.
    Tell the fishmonger what you want. Don't just take what ever they want to give you. I prefer center cut pieces that are thicker and more even to the tail pieces. If what's in the case doesn't look good, asl if they have anymore in the back they can cut for you.
    Steamed salmon skin is rubbery and not appealing to eat, so either skin the salmon before steaming or after steaming. After steaming, the skin will peel write off. Before steaming oyu can trim out the bloodline, which can have a stronger flavor.
    See photos in this post for help skinning salmon. 
    For flavorful sauce ideas, see the photos of ideas at the end of the post. 
     
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 320kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 34gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 94mgSodium: 379mgPotassium: 927mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 77IUVitamin C: 15mgCalcium: 43mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Watermelon Cucumber Juice

    06/22/2018 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    watermelon cucumber juice

    Watermelon: the iconic summer fruit turned into a refreshing and hydrating juice. With natural sweetness, watermelon cucumber juice is definitely a summer treat. Skip the bottled juices made from concentrated juice and unhealthy added sweeteners, colors and flavors. Mother Nature does just beautifully on her own.

    watermelon cucumber juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    Nothing Like Fresh Homemade Juice

    While our daily juice routine consists of mostly green vegetable juices with a little low sugar fruit such as green apples and lemons, this watermelon cucumber juice is a wonderful summer treat. Refreshing on a hot summer day. And since yesterday was the first official day of summer, I had to share this recipe with you for your summer enjoyment.

    Watermelon Cucumber Juice

    Watermelon and cucumber are so good for you and delicious when combined. Lime is added for tartness to balance the natural sweetness. It takes 1 mini watermelon, about 5 pounds, plus either 1 English cucumber or 4-5 small Persian cucumbers, and 1 lime (peeled) to make two 18-ounce servings. Your yield will depend on if use just the watermelon flesh or include some of the rind.

    Yes, you can even juice the rind. It has lots of nutrients too. Be sure your watermelon is organic. If juicing the rind, the color will be a little less pink, but it is still packed with nutrition.

    watermelon cucumber juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    Skip the Bottled Stuff

    Shopping recently, I saw a big display of bottled organic watermelon cucumber "cooler" at the store and read the label. The first ingredient was filtered water, the second organic sugar, then juice concentrates, organic flavors and extracts, natural flavors and citric acid as a preservative. The label also stated that it contained 15% juice.

    When you make homemade, its 100% fresh juice with no added sugar or anything else you don't want - just pure refreshing, healthy goodness. If you don't have a juicer, see this link for another recipe that uses a blender.

    watermelon juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    Health Benefits of Watermelon and Cucumber

    Because they are 92%-98% water, watermelons are great for hydration. They contain a significant amount of vitamin A, B6, antioxidants, amino acids and a specific powerful phytonutrient called lycopene.

    Lycopene is why watermelon is red. According to the Fitness Institute of Texas at The University of Texas at Austin, Lycopene has been linked with heart health, bone health, prostate cancer prevention and more. It's also a powerful antioxidant thought to have anti-inflammatory properties. Read the Live Science article here, it's got great information on the health benefits of watermelon.

    About Watermelon and Cucumbers

    A botanical relative of watermelon, cucumbers are another great hydrator, made up of 96% water. No wonder they taste extra good in summertime. Cucumbers may protect our brains, reduce cancer risks, manage stress and support digestive health. Read here for more health benefits of cucumbers.

    Some cucumbers come waxed. To insure they are clean for juicing I wash my produce with Eat Cleaner. It is 99% more effective than water in removing wax, pesticides, plus agricultural and handling residue that can carry bacteria. I've used it for years.

    watermelon cucumber juice \ afoodcentriclife.com
    Jars of watermelon cucumber juice.

    📖 Recipe

    watermelon cucumber juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    Watermelon Cucumber Juice

    Sally Cameron
    Refreshing and hydrating, watermelon cucumber juice has natural sweetness that needs no added sugar or flavors. Mint is a nice addition too. 
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Juices
    Cuisine American
    Servings 2 Yield approximately 36 ounces
    Calories 33 kcal

    Equipment

    • Juicer

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 mini watermelon about 5 pounds
    • 1 large English cucumber or 4 Persian cucumbers
    • 1 lime peeled

    Instructions
     

    • Wash all produce well. Cut into pieces the size that your juicer brand recommends, and juice. For the watermelon, you can juice the flesh, or the flesh and some or all of the rind. 

    Notes

    A botanical relative of watermelon, cucumbers are another great hydrator, made up of 96% water. No wonder they taste extra good in summertime. Cucumbers may protect our brains, reduce cancer risks, manage stress and support digestive health.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 33kcalCarbohydrates: 9gProtein: 1gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 4mgPotassium: 255mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 158IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 35mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make a Detox Green Juice

    04/25/2018 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    Detoxing green juice in a glass with a straw.

    Try this detox green juice when you need a little internal spring cleaning. This vibrant green juice is a powerful combination of dandelion greens, spinach, celery, herbs, green apple, lemon, ginger and cucumbers. Juice some up today and give your body a clean start for a fabulous spring or anytime you need a natural little detox support.

    dandy detox green juice in a glass with straw.

    I have a few green juice recipes on my site, but this one includes dandelion greens and other delicious detox ingredients. Detox green juice is good because green means chlorophyll, and chlorophyll rids the body of environmental toxins and promotes cleansing and detoxing.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll like This Recipe

    • Refreshing taste.
    • Supports and boosts natural detoxing.
    • Easily found ingredients.

    Here's another terrific green juice recipe with kale and lemon.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Dandelion greens: More than just an annoying garden weed, dandelion greens are edible bitter greens, great for cleansing your liver and kidneys, and full of vitamins A and C, and minerals. Because of their bitterness, start with just a few leaves until you develop a taste for them. The ginger, lemon and apple in this juice help offset the bitter taste. Dandelion is great has great benefits.

    Cucumbers: The phytonutrients in cucumbers provide valuable antioxidant, anti-inflammatory, and anti-cancer benefits as well as hydration.

    Celery: More than diet food, celery is an under-appreciated nutritional powerhouse provides potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, vitamin C,  plus it's anti-inflammatory and one of the most alkalinizing foods you can eat. Adding celery to your diet is good.

    Cilantro: Beyond guacamole and salsa, cilantro helps cleanse the body of toxic heavy metals, plus it's an incredible source of antioxidants, is naturally calming and has a long history of therapeutic use. Some people hate cilantro, so if you're in that club, use parsley instead and still get great health benefits.

    Green apples: a rich source of beneficial plant compounds called phytochemicals including quercetin, catechin, phloridzin and chlorogenic acid, all of which are strong antioxidants. Antioxidants stimulate bile production, which the liver uses to release toxins. The old adage "an apple a day" has truth behind it!

    Ginger and Lemon: Both add wonderful flavor to fresh juices. Ginger is a natural anti-inflammatory and digestive booster as is lemon, plus lemon is great for cleansing and promotes hydration. Lemon also helps your body's alkaline levels as it turns alkaline when it hits your digestive system.

    For quantities please see recipe card.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Substitute lime juice for lemon juice.
    • If you can't get green apples, choose another low sugar, tart apple variety. For more on choosing apple varieties, see this site from USApple .
    • Add a little ACV (apple cider vinegar) to increase this juices detoxing ability.
    • If you can't get dandelion greens, swap kale or spinach.

    Apple ginger beet juice is another terrific combination, not to mention a gorgeous ruby color.

    dandy detox green juice |AFoodcentricLife.com

    The Best Juicer

    Drinking fresh vegetable and fruit juices is super beneficial for your health and juicing at home gives you the best nutrition. No additives, no pasteurization, and you control the ingredients (as in all organic).

    To make juice at home, you will need a juicer. The best juicers on the market are slow, cold-press, masticating juicers. They do the best job of extracting all of the goodness from your produce without oxidizing the nutrients.

    To do that, I use a Greenstar juicer from Tribest. Juices last up to 72 hours with minimal nutrient loss. There are many good juicers on the market at all prices levels so find one at your price level.

    The new Shine easy cold-press juicer is terrific. Great for smaller kitchens, kitchens with limited storage, and with an affordable price tag for such a quality juicer.

    Wash Your Produce

    When I get all of my groceries unloaded and into the kitchen, I fill a sink up with Eat Cleaner Food Grade Wash and wash all of the produce at once. No rinsing required.

    Serving Suggestions

    Green juices and all freshly made juices are best soon after making. I love them at room temperature right out of the juicer. With the right juicer, you can make and hold them in the refrigerator to drink within 24-72 hours, which helps you get ahead.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is juicing daily a good habit? Yes. Read this post and decide for yourself.

    What are the ingredients for a detox green juice?

    Green produce ingredients are terrific for a detoxing green juice, such as dandelion, cilantro, cabbage, cucumber, lime, mint, green apple, celery, and ginger are all terrific and taste great in green juice. There are other good ingredients to help you detox but not all will taste great in a juice.

    How do I make a detox green juice at home?

    First you'll need a good juicer. They come in all price ranges. The best at preserving nutrients are slow, cold-press, masticating juicers as the give you the most bang for your buck detox and nutritionally. Buy the right herbs, fruits, vegetables and leafy greens. Wash them well with produce wash when you get home. Store them and get them ready to juice ahead saves time. Buy organic is best. Get some good, inexpensive glass bottle around 18 ounces to hold you juice.

    What are the health benefits of detox green juice?

    Detox green juice supports your body's natural mechanism in eliminating toxins from your liver, reduces inflammation, aids weight loss, gives your skin a healthy boost, improves mental alertness, reduces brain fog, and increase energy. That's a pretty great list of health benefits!

    How often should I drink detox green juice for it to be effective?

    Drinking a detox green juice daily is a good habit with terrific health benefits. If you have any concerns about specific ingredients in a green juice recipe because of certain medications you are taking, be sure to check with your healthcare practitioner before starting detox green juices. Depending on the green detox recipe, some ingredients have higher levels of vitamin K which may alter blood thinning medications. Be safe first.

    Does drinking green juice replace eating green vegetables?

    Absolutely not. Green juices do not replace consuming green vegetables. Juices are additional to a diet with a good amount of healthy green vegetables. Vegetables provide necessary fiber and fullness. Green juices give you extra level of powerful phytonutrients in those green vegetables. You need both!

    More Juice Recipes

    Here are a few more green juice recipe and other healthy juice recipes to try. They all taste great.

    • Green Juice with Cabbage and Celery
    • Glasses of bright green, healthy cucumber, celery vegetables juice.
      Celery Cucumber Juice
    • watermelon cucumber juice
      Watermelon Cucumber Juice
    • carrot celery morning glow juice
      Carrot Ginger Juice Recipe

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    spring detox green juice |AFoodcentricLife.com

    Detox Green Juice

    Sally Cameron
    This vibrant green juice is loaded with healing benefits as well as detoxifying capabilities. If you can't find dandelions greens use kale instead or all spinach. 
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Juice
    Cuisine American
    Servings 2 16 ounce each
    Calories 109 kcal

    Equipment

    • Electric juicer

    Ingredients
      

    • 6-8 ribs celery
    • 3-4 leaves dandelion greens or more
    • ½ bunch cilantro or parsley
    • 3-4 Persian cucumbers or 1 English cucumber
    • 4 ounces baby spinach 4 big handfuls
    • 1" piece fresh raw unpeeled ginger
    • 1 lemon
    • 1 Granny Smith apple cored

    Instructions
     

    • Wash produce well. Chop produce into the appropriate size for your juicer, then juice according to the manufacturers directions. Strain if desired.

    Notes

    If you can't get dandelion greens, swap spinach or kale. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 109kcalCarbohydrates: 27gProtein: 4gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 0.2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gSodium: 147mgPotassium: 955mgFiber: 7gSugar: 14gVitamin A: 6292IUVitamin C: 56mgCalcium: 142mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Green Smoothie Recipe with Mango

    06/25/2013 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Tropical Mango Green Smoothie

    A simple, tropical green smoothie recipe made with mango, baby spinach leaves, chia, and homemade almond milk. Don't let the bright green color throw you. It's delicious! Smoothies are a great way to start the day. They whip up in seconds and are transportable and customizable to each persons tastes and dietary preferences. Delicious and healthy!

    Tropical Mango Green Smoothie

    I've been stuck on my raspberry-banana smoothie for a long time and decided it was time to create some new flavors. With the gift of a half dozen mangoes from the Mango Board, a smoothie was my first thought. Mangoes bring that sweet taste of the tropics to everything. While combining mango with spinach leaves might sound crazy, it makes a terrific smoothie.

    How to Choose a Mango

    To choose a ripe mango, squeeze it gently. it should give slightly like a ripe peach or avocado. Firm but with a slight give. The color of the skin is not the best indicator. If the mango is hard, keep it at room temperature until it is ripe, then refrigerate, but not before. Once refrigerated, a mango will last about 5 days. If they get soft and you don't have time to use them, peel, cube and freeze the flesh so it is not wasted.

    how to cut up a mango

    How To Cut Up a Mango

    Mangoes can be challenging to cut up the first time, so here are a few tips. Mangoes have a large, flat, center seed.

    First, wash the mango. Next, stand the mango with the stem end on the cutting board. Cut a little off center, through the flesh and you will get a large piece of mango, sometimes called a cheek. You may need to test with your knife a time or two to find just the right spot to cut. If you cut too close and hit the seed, just move a ¼″ off and try again.

    how to cut up a mango

    When you have cut the "cheeks" off the seed, cut a grid pattern on the mango with a sharp paring knife. Don't cut through the skin. Then scoop out the cubes with a spoon. Most of what is left is the seed. You might be able to harvest a little more mango flesh off the center piece, but not much.

    For more information (and a video) on how to cut up a mango, check out the National Mango Board site.

    More About Healthy Smoothie Ingredients

    Baby Spinach Leaves

    This green smoothie gets its beautiful bright color from fresh baby spinach leaves. While spinach might sound like a strange thing for a smoothie, it's a great way to get leafy greens in as you start your day. Add about a cup, or a big handful, to your blender. Spinach is super-nutritious and one of the world's healthiest vegetables, rich in vitamins and minerals, plus anti-inflammatory benefits.

    Chia Seeds

    Another addition to this smoothie is chia seed. Chia was eaten by the ancient Aztec Indians for strength. Chia is a source of omega fatty acids and dietary fiber, plus calcium, iron, potassium and protein. The brand I buy is Navitas Naturals. Maker of high quality products, their chia is organic, non-GMO, raw, gluten-free, and vegan. Check out their other fantastic products too. Lots of healthy things to add to your smoothies, and overall, your diet. Superfoods!

    Once your mango is cubed, get out your blender or Vitamix, ready your spinach, almond milk and chia seeds and get ready for a great smoothie!

    Another Great Mango Recipe

    For another recipe idea using mangoes, try this pineapple-mango salsa. It's great on grilled chicken, shrimp and fish.

    green smoothie

    📖 Recipe

    Tropical Mango Green Smoothie

    Green Smoothie Recipe with Mango

    Sally Cameron
    Spinach and mango might sound like a crazy combination, but it makes a tasty and healthy tropical green smoothie. Add chia seed for protein and fiber. Use your favorite protein powder. If you want a frosty cold smoothie, freeze the mango ahead of time. To reduce sugar, use a greenish banana instead of a ripe one.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1 serving
    Calories 391 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 ounces almond milk preferably homemade
    • 1 big handful baby spinach leaves
    • 1-2 scoops preferred protein powder 
    • ½ cup cubed mango fresh or frozen
    • 2 tablespoons chia seed
    • ½ banana

    Instructions
     

    • Place everything in a blender in order given.
    • Process until you reach desired texture.

    Notes

    This green smoothie gets its beautiful bright color from fresh baby spinach leaves. While spinach might sound like a strange thing for a smoothie, it's a great way to get green leafy vegetables in as you start your day. Most people say they can't even taste it!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 391kcalCarbohydrates: 42gProtein: 33gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 1gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 464mgPotassium: 854mgFiber: 13gSugar: 21gVitamin A: 6289IUVitamin C: 51mgCalcium: 646mgIron: 5mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Healthy Granola Recipe

    04/15/2023 by Sally Cameron 6 Comments

    A close up of an open jar of homemade granola with a silver scoop.

    This healthy granola recipe is crazy crunchy, and maple-roasted with real coconut oil-toasty oats, warm cinnamon, and a mix of nuts and seeds for flavor you'll actually crave. It's whole-grain, naturally sweetened, and takes about 10 minutes of prep; the oven does the rest. Use certified gluten-free oats if needed.

    A glass jar of freshly baked granola with a scooper in the top.

    After years of making this easy healthy granola recipe for clients and loved ones-and hearing "this is the best granola ever"-I had to share it with you, too. It tastes amazing, uses real, wholesome ingredients, and proves that healthy homemade granola can be ridiculously good without refined sugar or unhealthy fats like many store-bought brands. Seriously, try this healthy gluten-free granola recipe!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Healthy Granola Recipe Highlights

    • Healthier ingredients - No refined sugar, high-fructose corn syrup, or poor quality oils.
    • Truly easy - A few minutes of prep and the oven does the rest.
    • Customizable sweetness - Add dried fruit, or skip it for a lower-sugar version.
    • Whole-grain goodness - Rolled oats (GF if needed) deliver fiber, minerals, and that satisfying crunchy bite.
    • Low-sugar granola - Per-serving sugar is lower than many store-bought brands

    For a fun and more portable version of healthy homemade, granola try my chocolate chip granola bites recipe. They are sort of like granola bars but round.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for healthy homemade granola in bowls ready to start baking.
    • Rolled oats - Use old-fashioned rolled oats; gluten-free if needed. Avoid extra-thick or quick-cooking oats for the best crunch.
    • Coconut - Unsweetened shredded coconut. Skip sweetened; it's sticky and overly sugary.
    • Nuts - Chopped walnuts and blanched slivered almonds for crunch, flavor, and healthy fats.
    • Sunflower seeds - Raw and unsalted so you control the seasoning.
    • Flaxseed - Use either whole seeds and grind fresh before mixing or ground flaxseed. Store ground flax in the fridge or freezer.
    • Hemp hearts - Raw shelled hemp seeds (hearts), not powder. Delicate, nutty, and protein-rich.
    • Maple syrup - 100% pure maple, not fake "pancake syrup" for the best flavor and crunch.
    • Fat - Use unrefined extra-virgin coconut oil for its toasty aroma, rich flavor, and a crisp texture. It hardens slightly as it cools, helping the granola set and bind for that signature crunchy coating.
    • Vanilla - Extract or vanilla bean paste; paste adds visible specks and a more pronounced vanilla note.
    • Spices - Cinnamon is classic; try a pinch of Chinese five-spice or pumpkin pie spice for variation.
    • Dried fruit (optional) - For lower sugar, skip. If using, stir in after baking and cooling to keep the fruit soft and the granola crisp. See tips section below.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and salt.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Coconut allergy - Swap coconut oil for avocado oil or a healthy neutral oil, and skip the shredded coconut.
    • Swap nuts - Use pecans instead of walnuts.
    • Flavor - Try almond extract instead of vanilla )or a little of both).
    • Add-ins - Try chocolate chips or sugar-free chocolate chips after cooling.

    How to Make Health Homemade Granola

    Pre-heat the oven to 250°F and ready 2 half sheet rimmed baking sheets. If you only have one, you can still make homemade granola, it just needs to bake longer to get crunchy ( up to 3 hours vs 2 hours).

    Ingredients in a glass bowl to mix for granola.
    Mixing wet ingredients with dry ingredients for homemade granola.

    Step 1: In a large mixing bowl, measure out the dry ingredients: oats, nuts and seeds. A kitchen scale makes it easy and fast.

    Step 2: Whisk together the wet ingredients: maple syrup, melted coconut oil, vanilla extract, and your spices of choice, and a pinch of salt. Pour the maple syrup mixture into the dry mix and stir until the oats feel uniformly heavy. A large non-stick silicone spatula makes it easier. Stir really well! There should be no dry areas left.

    Spreading granola mixture onto a baking sheet for baking.

    Step 3: Spread granola mixture evenly onto 2 rimmed baking sheets (no parchment paper) and bake for 2 hours in total until golden brown.

    I use a metal spatula (sometimes called a turner) to loosen the granola from the pan and my hands to mix. The pan is hot but the granola is not too hot for your hands.

    Baked granola cooling on a rack with a metal spatula to stir.

    Step 4: Cool gluten-free granola completely after baking. It crisps more as it cools. Mix in dried fruit if desired. See tips on choosing dried fruit below, or skip it to reduce sugar. It's delicious either way. Store in an airtight container.

    Chef's Tip - Want More Clusters? This recipe bakes into a loose, crunchy granola, if you stir it halfway. If you prefer granola clusters, skip stirring while baking, press the mixture firmly into an even layer on the pan before it goes in the oven, and allow it to cool completely before breaking it apart. For extra binding, mix in 1-2 lightly beaten egg white before baking.

    Tips for Adding Dried Fruit in Granola

    If you have asthma or a sulfite sensitivity, always read labels and choose unsulfured dried fruit (without sulfur dioxide). Sulfur dioxide is a common preservative that helps dried fruit-like apricots-keep their bright color. Sulfite-free apricots are usually brown instead of orange, but they're the safer choice if you're sensitive.

    Examples of dried fruit options for homemade granola.
    • Flavor ideas. - Raisins or currants (classic), tart cherries (bakery vibes), chopped dates (caramel notes), apricots (bright), blueberries (breakfast-y).
    • Add after baking (and cooling) - Stir dried fruit in once the granola is completely cool so the fruit stays soft and the granola stays crisp.
    • Chop for even bites - Cut larger fruits (apricots, figs, dates, cherries) to raisin-size pieces so they distribute evenly.
    • Read labels - Look for unsweetened or apple-juice-sweetened fruit and unsulfured options (common sulfites show up in apricots, pineapple, etc.).
    • Lower-sugar picks - Golden berries and white mulberries are naturally less sweet/tarter than many dried fruits. Brands vary-check the nutrition panel.
    • Start light - A little goes a long way; add just enough for pops of chewy sweetness rather than blanketing the batch.
    Homemade granola with berries and coconut milk pouring into the bowl,

    Serving Suggestions

    • Yogurt topper: Sprinkle over Greek yogurt (or coconut yogurt) for a quick breakfast or build pretty breakfast parfaits with fresh berries.
    • Like cereal: Serve in a bowl with almond milk, coconut milk, or dairy milk-it stays loose and crunchy.
    • Snack attack: Keep a jar on the counter and scoop a small handful for an afternoon pick-me-up.
    • Dessert finish: Dust over frozen yogurt or ice cream; add a few raspberries for color and contrast.
    • Fruit-forward: Skip dried fruit and pair with fresh berries-raspberries, blueberries, strawberries, or blackberries are perfect.
    • Bowls & bakes (optional): Sprinkle on smoothie bowls, baked apples/pears, or roasted stone fruit for a toasty crunch.

    Chef's Note: Homemade gluten-free granola is a terrific gift from the kitchen for a hostess or holiday gift. Package it in cello bags and tie with a ribbon. Another terrific homemade gift? So are these roasted cashews. Alway a hit.

    Breakfast setting with a jar of granola, bowls, and raspberries.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is eating homemade granola healthy?

    Yes - especially when you make it yourself. Homemade granola is healthier than most store-bought versions because you control the ingredients, the amount of sugar, and the type of fat. It's whole-grain, satisfying, and naturally nutrient-dense when made with oats, nuts, and seeds.

    What is the healthiest way to eat granola?

    The quick answer: with yogurt! Yogurt adds protein to balance the carbs in granola. Layer it into breakfast parfaits with berries or other fruit, or enjoy it simply in a bowl with milk. It also makes a great snack eaten out of hand.

    Why isn't my homemade granola crunchy?

    To make granola crunchy, bake it low and slow to dry it out without burning. I bake mine at 250°F for 2-3 hours, which creates that perfectly crisp texture. Stir occasionally, then let it cool completely before storing-it continues to crisp as it cools.

    How do I make granola with clusters?

    This recipe is designed to be loose and crunchy. For granola clusters, use a bit more binder (extra maple + oil or 1 lightly whisked egg white), press firmly on the pan, don't stir, and cool completely before breaking apart.

    More Breakfast Recipes

    From chia pudding to parfaits and waffles and even a nice breakfast casserole for brunch, check out the breakfast category for inspiration.

    • A glass of cream chia coconut pudding topped with blueberries and raspberries with a silver spoon.
      Chia Pudding with Coconut Milk
    • A single yogurt breakfast parfait with layers of fruit, granola, and yogurt.
      How to Make Greek Yogurt Parfaits
    • Close up of crispy golden waffles with blueberries, raspberries, strawberries.
      Gluten Free Waffles (Crisp & Golden)
    • A piece of golden baked breakfast casserole with eggs on a plate with a fork and dollop of sour cream on top.
      Cottage Cheese and Egg Bake

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this easy simple granola recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A close up of an open jar of homemade granola with a silver scoop.

    Healthy Granola Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    Homemade granola is the best! Crunchy, golden, and fresh. For gluten-free purchase gluten-free oats. For dried fruit options see notes below. Skip all fruit if reducing sugar. Yield 2 quarts of granola, or 1 1/34 pounds.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 2 hours hrs
    Cooling time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 16 ½ cup servings (yield 1 ¾ pounds)
    Calories 252 kcal

    Equipment

    • 1-2 Rimmed baking sheets half sheet size
    • digital kitchen scale optional but really helpful

    Ingredients
      

    Dry Ingredients

    • 3 cups traditional rolled oats (gluten-free or not) 12 ounces
    • ¾ cup unsweetened shredded coconut 2 ounces
    • ½ cup chopped walnuts 2 ounces
    • ½ cup blanched slivered almonds 2 ¾ ounces
    • ¼ cup raw sunflower seeds 1 ½ ounces
    • 3 tablespoons ground flax seed
    • 3 tablespoons hemp seed

    Wet Ingredients

    • ½ cup real maple syrup 5.3 ounces
    • ½ cup melted extra virgin coconut oil 4 ounces, or MCT oil
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract or 1 teaspoon vanilla paste
    • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon or Chinese Five Spice
    • ⅛ teaspoon fine sea salt

    Dried Fruit Options (omit to lower sugar)

    • ¼ cup dried cranberries
    • ¼ cup golden berries

    Instructions
     

    Mix Granola

    • Pre-heat the oven to 250°F. In a large bowl mix rolled oats, nuts and seeds. In a large measuring cup whisk maple syrup, oil, vanilla and cinnamon until smooth. Pour the maple mixture into the oats mixture and stir until well combined. The oats should feel uniformly heavy and well coated with no dry areas.

    Bake Granola

    • Pour granola between two half sheet sized rimmed baking sheets and bake for 2 hours, until dry and crunchy. It will get crunchier as it cools.
      Note below if you only have one baking sheet.

    Cool and Add Fruit

    • Remove from the oven and cool, then stir in coconut shreds or chips and dried fruit if using. Store in a tightly covered container in the pantry.

    Notes

    If you only have 1 half rimmed baking sheet, it may take up to 3 hours to bake as the granola is not as spread out. Two works better. 
    Larger sheet pan. I have a 30" wide sheet pan and a large oven, so I can get a whole batch on this single pan. If you have a large oven, look for a larger sheet pan that fits vs the standard half-sheet size. I make granola frequently so this works for me, and maybe it will for you too.
    Dried fruit options: besides dried cranberries, try dried cherries, blueberries, golden berries (lower sugar), apricots, goji berries, currants, pitted chopped dates, or raisins. 
    Nutritional note: Made without dried fruit, this granola has 7 grams of sugar per ½ cup serving. With the cranberries and golden berries added, it has 9 grams of sugar per ½ cup serving.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 0.5cupCalories: 252kcalCarbohydrates: 21gProtein: 5gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.001gSodium: 23mgPotassium: 166mgFiber: 4gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 17IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 42mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Saffron Risotto (Risotto Milanese)

    10/03/2011 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    golden risotto Milanese with peas

    Making saffron risotto is like therapy in a pan. Slowly stir hot broth steeped with saffron into Italian short-grain rice until the grains are tender and creamy. A little wine for the pan, a little wine for you. And then you get to eat this creamy classic Italian dish. Here is my favorite, to which I've added peas. All ingredients are easily kept in the pantry. Serve it as a main topped with shrimp, chicken, scallops, meat, or as a side dish. Risotto is simply heavenly. It takes just a little patience but that first bite will make it worthwhile.

    Golden risotto Milanese with saffron and peas in a bowl served as a side dish.

    My favorite risotto recipe and I've been making it for decades. Once you learn the basics of making risotto, you can make many delightful variations. I'm often asked what would be my last meal. My answer? Risotto Milanese with lobster (which I make at the holidays), and a glass of Champagne, but I make this simple risotto weekly in fall and winter.

    Why You'll Love Saffron Risotto

    • If you love rice, you'll love risotto.
    • It's comfort food in a pan; the ultimate rice dish.
    • Ingredients are easily kept in the pantry.
    • There are many variations of risotto.
    • Add a protein, like seared scallops, shrimp, diced chicken, cook sausage, or meat.

    Recipe Ingredients

    This ingredient list reflects risotto in the style of Milan, Italy, called Milanese. It's an incredible Italian rice dish. It's also called Risotto alla Milanese.

    • Chicken broth: This is a good place to use homemade. If you buy your broth, buy low sodium and read labels to get a good quality broth. Look in the freezer section too.
    • Saffron: The king of spices. Saffron is a beautiful red color and looks like threads. It's the most expensive spice in the world, sold in very small amounts. Good thing is you only need a little bit for the recipe. It gives this recipe the beautiful golden color and flavor.
    • Oil: good quality extra virgin olive oil shines in risotto. Here is the olive oil always in my pantry.
    • Onion: Sautéed onion is the savory base for risotto called the soffritto. It's like the Italian mirepoix trio of onion, carrot and celery. For risotto, use just onion. Go with a yellow, brown or white onion.
    • Garlic: A must have for more flavor, cooked with the onion. Use fresh cloves.
    • Rice: For creamy risotto, use the right rice; Italian superfino rices. They have just the right amount of starch. My favorite is this carnaroli rice but arborio works too and is more available in the markets. You can't use standard rice for real risotto.
    • Wine: White wine is the best for this risotto. Use a little mini airline sized bottle, either Sauvignon Blanc or Chardonnay. Wine adds dimension and flavor.
    • Peas: Frozen petite peas work well, and the petites are more tender than regular peas. If it's spring, use fresh peas and blanch them first (cook briefly in boiling salted water). Optional.
    • Parmesan cheese: Get real Parmigiano-Reggiano, the Italian "king of cheeses". It's optional if you are dairy-free, but it adds a rich saltiness and classic savory flavor if you can handle dairy.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip: Good broth is important for risotto. If you 've never made homemade, try one of these two recipes: long simmered homemade chicken brone broth or a faster version, Instant Pot chicken broth or other pressure cooker. Freeze homemade broth in batches for recipes such as this risotto.

    Substitutions and Variations

    There are almost endless variations of risotto, here are just a few ideas:

    • Skip the peas and use cooked chopped asparagus for an asparagus risotto recipe.
    • Add crisp crumbled bacon for risotto with peas and bacon.
    • Add chopped oil-packed (drained) sun-dried tomatoes.
    • Add a little chopped fennel to the onion when cooking the soffritto.
    • Add mushrooms.
    • Add a protein, like diced cooked chicken, for chicken and pea risotto.
    • If you prefer not to cook with wine, just skip it and continue with the recipe.
    • Add diced cooked ham for a pea and ham risotto.
    • To top with spicy Italian shrimp, make the easy shrimp from this recipe.
    • For a mushroom risotto, skip the saffron and stir in a ¼ or more of this mushroom duxelles recipe. It's devine.

    Recipe Instructions

    Risotto is not hard to cook. Get your prep work done, and with a little patience and stirring, you'll have a wonderful risotto dinner.

    Step 1: Prep and set-up for cooking. Chop the onion and garlic, get the broth heated up on the stove top, and measure out your rice and wine. Place everything near the stove before you start.

    Step 2: Saute the onion in olive oil until soft, then add the garlic and cook briefly. Add the rice and cook for 1-2 minutes until the grains are coated in oil.

    Cooking risotto in a pan, showing when to add more broth.

    Step 3: Add the wine and cook most of it off. Next, start slowly adding simmering broth, stirring gently with a wooden spoon. Add the broth at about ¼ cup to a ⅓ cup pace. You will know when to add more broth when you can draw your spoon across the rice and a trough forms.

    When you're near the end of the broth, stir in the peas. Note - You may not use all 3 cups of broth. Taste the risotto. It should be tender and creamy to the bite. Serve in warmed bowls, with Parmesan if using.

    The Best Pan for Risotto

    A good pan for making risotto (and sauces) is called a saucier. It has sloped sides making it easy to stir the rice. It's a terrific pan to have in your collection. If you don't have such a pan, be sure as you stir your risotto to get into the outer edges of the pan so the grains of rice do not stick. 

    If you have a medium size, 3 ½ quart Le Creuset, its works fine because the sides are not perfectly straight and just a little sloped. Use a wooden spoon when making risotto to treat the beautiful rice grains gently.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve risotto in low wide soup bowls, pasta bowls, or risotto bowls. Warm them up in a low oven keeps the risotto warm.

    Recipe FAQs

    How is risotto different than rice?

    Risotto is the name of a classic Italian rice dish made with one of several special Italian superfino rices with high starch contents: Arborio, Carnaroli, or Vialone Nano. These rice varieties are higher starch and short to medium grain, and they absorb a lot of broth providing the creamy texture of good risotto.

    Can you use normal rice for risotto rice?

    Purists and risotto-lovers (like me) say no. Some people say a long grain white rice will work, but it's just not the same. Buy the real rice for risotto and you will see why it's so good. Risotto is not made with standard rice.

    Why don't you wash rice for risotto?

    Because you want the starchiness of the rice as it produces the creamy texture of risotto.

    More Recipes

    For more recipes with rice, or making cauliflower rice for a lower carb side dish option check these recipes out. The pork chops make a terrific gravy, and are nice served with rice.

    • A bowl of chicken rice soup with herbs in a white bowl.
      Easy Instant Pot Chicken Rice Soup Recipe
    • brown rice in white bowl
      How to Reduce Arsenic in Rice
    • cauliflower rice
      Cheesy Cauliflower Rice
    • Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.
      Sour Cream Pork Chops Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    tisotto Milanese | afoodcentriclife.com

    Saffron Risotto

    Sally Cameron
    Risotto is a wonderful comfort food dish. The ingredients may already be in your pantry and fridge. Make it your own: Top with chicken, seared scallops, shrimp or even sliced chicken sausage for a satisfying main course. This recipe doubles for four, it will take longer to cook. 
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 2
    Calories 565 kcal

    Equipment

    • 3 quart pan preferably a saucier with sloped side

    Ingredients
      

    • 2/12 cups broth: chicken, vegetable, beef, veal, turkey preferably homemade
    • ⅛-1/4 teaspoon saffron threads crushed
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • ½ cup finely chopped onion ½ small
    • 1 large fresh garlic clove finely chopped or zested
    • ½ cup Carnaroli or Arborio rice
    • ⅓ cup dry white wine
    • ⅓ cup   frozen petite peas thawed, optional
    • ⅓ cup grated Parmigiano-Reggiano cheese optional
    • Salt and pepper to taste

    Instructions
     

    • Place chicken broth in a small saucepan and bring to a bare simmer. Crush the saffron into the pan and allow it to release its flavor and golden color into the broth.
    • Place a medium pan over medium heat. Heat olive oil then add onion and cook until soft and translucent, stirring with a wooden spoon.  Add the garlic and cook another 60 seconds. Watch your heat and turn down if needed.
    • Add the rice and cook for 1-2 minutes, stirring, until the rice is coated with the oil. Add the wine and cook until it is almost gone. Season with a little salt.
    • Begin adding the hot broth about a ¼ cup or so at a time, stirring the risotto gently with the wooden spoon until the broth is absorbed. Do again with more broth, stirring until almost absorbed. Add more broth when you can draw your spoon through the rice and it holds a line.
      Repeat until most of the broth is incorporated. Towards then end, taste it for texture. The rice should be al dente, soft to the bite. You will feel when it is done. It takes about 25 minutes. Taste and season with additional salt and pepper.

    Notes

    About a good pan for making risotto (and sauces). The best pan has sloped sides making it easy to stir the rice. It's called a saucier. It's a terrific pan to have in your collection, If you don't have such a pan, be sure as you stir your risotto to get into the outer edges of the pan so the grains of rice do not stick. 
    Variations
    If you are not a pea fan, use sliced, cooked asparagus. To make it vegetarian or vegan, use homemade vegetable broth and skip the cheese. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 565kcalCarbohydrates: 69gProtein: 20gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 11mgSodium: 380mgPotassium: 530mgFiber: 4gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 315IUVitamin C: 15mgCalcium: 237mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Mussels in White Wine (Moules Marinières)

    10/10/2011 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Steamed mussels in a white bowl

    Mussels in white wine, also known as the French classic Moules Marinières, are perfect for a quick weeknight dinner-and just as fun for entertaining. Mussels are budget-friendly, full of flavor, and cook in minutes. Grab a loaf of crusty bread for soaking up that aromatic broth, and keep a soup spoon handy because you'll want every last sip. Never cooked mussels before? I'll show you how easy it is.

    Black shell steamed mussels with red napkin.

    If you've only enjoyed mussels at a restaurant and never made them at home, now is the time. While traditional recipes use only white wine, I sometimes add a splash of the classic French liqueur Pernod for a subtle twist. Prefer to keep it traditional? Just use white wine. And don't buy a big bottle to experiment-grab an airline-size mini bottle at the liquor store.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Enjoy Mussels in White Wine

    • Easy to make - Mussels cook quickly and are nearly impossible to overthink.
    • Budget-friendly - An impressive dish that's surprisingly inexpensive.
    • They tell you when they're done - Once the shells open, they're ready.
    • Fun to cook - Especially if you've never made mussels at home before.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Olive oil - For sautéing the aromatics and building flavor in the broth.
    • Fennel - Fresh fennel adds a light, sweet anise note; save the fronds for garnish.
    • Leek - Use the white and pale green parts only for a gentle, aromatic base.
    • Garlic - Adds that signature punch of flavor.
    • White wine - Use a dry white wine such as Sauvignon Blanc or unoaked Chardonnay.
    • Mussels - Fresh, live mussels; see tips below for buying, cleaning, and storing.
    • Bread - For soaking up the broth-gluten-free or regular, sourdough or artisan.

    Garishes

    • Tomato - Roma tomato as they are meatier.
    • Herbs - Chopped Italian parsley for freshness and color.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Pernod - A classic French anise liqueur with a lightly sweet licorice-style flavor. It's delicious but strong, so if you use it, think "a splash' in combination with the wine for a subtle twist. If you don't have Pernod, you can substitute Pastis or French anisette.
    • For no alcohol: use vegetable broth with fresh squeezed lemon juice. Another opt-in is Verjus, and unfermented (no-alcohol) grape juice or clam juice. This is the best option for kids too.

    Buying, Storing, and Cleaning Mussels

    Buying Mussels

    Fresh mussels should smell clean and briny, like the ocean-not fishy. Look for mussels sold loose or in netted bags on ice at a good seafood counter. Many mussels will be closed, but a few may be slightly open if they're cold. Give them a minute, then tap or gently squeeze the shell-if it closes, it's alive. Discard any mussels with cracked, chipped, or broken shells, and any that don't close after a minute or two.

    Storing Mussels

    Mussels are best cooked within a day of purchase. When you get home, transfer them to a large bowl and set them over ice (or nest the bowl in a larger bowl of ice). Cover with a damp paper towel or clean kitchen towel and refrigerate until ready to cook. Don't store them sealed in plastic, or they can suffocate and die.

    Cleaning Mussels

    Just before cooking, place the bowl in the sink and rinse the mussels under cold running water. Swirl them around and let them sit briefly to help loosen any grit, then drain. Scrub the shells with a brush and remove any dark, frizzy "beard" (the fibers that anchor them). Pull it off firmly with your fingers; if it's stubborn, use small pliers.

    Chef's Tip - How to Double Mussels Without Overcrowding
    This recipe is written for 2 pounds of mussels (about 2 servings). To serve 4, double the ingredients and cook the mussels loosely piled, not tightly packed. For best results (depending on pot size), cook in two batches (and keep the first warm) or split the mussels between two large pots (2 pounds per pot) so they have room to open and steam properly. A pasta pot works well; you don't need an oversized stockpot. Just use a big pot that holds 2 pounds.

    How to Make Mussels in White WIne

    You'll need a large pot with a tight-fitting lid. How many mussels you can cook at once depends on the size of your pot. If you're cooking for 4 people and want everything ready at the same time, use two large pots and cook 2 pounds per pot. If you have a very large stockpot (about 12 quarts), you can cook all 4 pounds in one pot.

    Prep the Vegetables

    To make things easy, do your prep ahead of time: slice the fennel, leek, and tomato for the broth, and chop the herbs for garnish.

    • Trim the fennel bulb, reserving the fronds for garnish, and thinly slice.
    • Use only the white and pale green parts of the leek. Slice lengthwise, rinse well to remove any grit, then slice thinly.

    How to Cook the Mussels

    Heat a little olive oil in a large pot over medium-low heat. Add the fennel and leek and cook gently until soft and translucent. Add the garlic and cook for one minute.

    Move the pot off the heat, then add the Pernod (if using) and white wine.

    Safety tip: Always add alcohol off the heat-liqueurs have a higher alcohol content and can be flammable.

    Return the pot to the heat, increase to medium, and bring the broth to a boil. Add the cleaned mussels, cover tightly, and cook for about 3 minutes. Peek under the lid to check-most of the mussels should be open.

    Knowing When Mussels Are Done

    Once the shells open, the mussels are done. Give the pot a quick shake, cover, and cook about 1 more minute to allow any remaining closed mussels to open. Turn off the heat and let the pot rest briefly while you get the bowls ready. Serve immediately while hot.

    Steamed mussels in a white bowl.

    Serving Mussels

    Serve mussels in warm bowls with plenty of broth, or spoon them over pasta (or zucchini noodles for a low-carb option). Divide the mussels between bowls and ladle the flavorful juices over the top. Discard any mussels that don't open. Finish with a sprinkle of diced tomato and parsley (or reserved fennel fronds) for garnish.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make this recipe without wine?
    Yes. Use vegetable broth and finish with fresh lemon juice for brightness. Verjus or unfermented grape juice are also good substitutes.

    How long do mussels take to cook?
    Mussels cook very quickly-usually 3-5 minutes once covered. As soon as the shells open, they're done.

    How do I know if mussels are fresh?

    Fresh mussels should smell clean and briny (like the ocean) and have intact shells. Many will be closed, but a few may be slightly open if they're cold. Give them a minute, then tap the shell or gently squeeze it-if it closes, it's alive. If it stays open after a minute or two, or has a cracked shell, discard it.

    What do I do with mussels that don't open?

    Discard them. Mussels that don't open during cooking should not be eaten.

    More Easy Seafood Recipes

    Seafood doesn't have to be complicated. Here are a few more quick, reliable recipes to keep in your dinner rotation. Be sure to check out the seafood recipe index.

    • Grilled shrimp on bamboo sticks on a white platter with chimchurri sauce.
      Shrimp Skewers (Grilled or Oven)
    • baked lemon shrimp scampi
      Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi
    • seared scallops with pasta
      Pasta Recipe With Scallops
    • Seared salmon
      Simple Stovetop Salmon

    Please Leave a Comment

    If you made mussels in white wine, please leave a comment or ask a question if needed. I love hearing from you and am here to help. Comments and questions help other readers too.

    📖 Recipe

    steamed mussels | AFoodcentriclife.com

    Mussels in White Wine (Moules Marinières)

    Sally Cameron
    Steamed mussels is an inexpensive and easy meal that comes together quickly.  The mussels steam in about three to five minutes. Plan on a pound per person as a main course. To steam four pounds I use two large pots. This recipe doubles easily for four servings or halve it for a single serving. The classic French liqueur Pernod is flavored with star anise and herbs, a wonderful addition to steamed mussels. See tips for buying mussels below. Serve alone or over pasta or zucchini noodles.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 7 minutes mins
    Total Time 22 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine French
    Servings 2
    Calories 411 kcal

    Equipment

    • large pot with lid

    Ingredients
      

    • 1-2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • ½ small fennel bulb save fronds to chop for garnish, diced small
    • ½ medium leek white and pale green parts only, thinly sliced
    • 1 large garlic clove chopped fine
    • 3 ounces dry white wine or 5 ounces if not using Pernod
    • 2 ounces Pernod
    • 2 pounds fresh live mussels scrubbed clean and de-bearded

    Garnishes

    • 1 Roma tomato chopped fine
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped Italian parsley
    • 1 small loaf bread to soak up the broth gluten-free or regular

    Instructions
     

    • Place a large pot over medium-low heat and add olive oil. When warm, add the fennel and leek. Cook, stirring occasionally, until soft and translucent, about 2 minutes. Do not brown the vegetables. Add the garlic and cook one minute.
    • Move the pan off of the heat and carefully add the wine and Pernod. Place the pan back on the heat and allow broth to come to a boil. Add the mussels, cover with a tight fitting lid and turn heat down to medium. Steam mussels until they have opened, about 3-5 minutes. Check pan at 3 minutes. If they are mostly opened, replace lid, shake the pan and steam 1 minute longer. Turn off heat.
    • To serve, distribute mussels between two warmed bowls, spoon broth over the top and garnish with tomatoes and herbs. Serve with bread to soak up all of the broth.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 411kcalCarbohydrates: 19gProtein: 29gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 65mgSodium: 702mgPotassium: 1144mgFiber: 3gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 1246IUVitamin C: 36mgCalcium: 114mgIron: 10mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Simple Easy Coleslaw Recipe

    07/18/2022 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    White shallow bowl stilled with green cabbage coleslaw, carrots, and parsley with a light dressing.

    Green cabbage is the star in this simple easy coleslaw recipe. With just three basic ingredients and a light, creamy dressing, this homemade slaw is crisp, crunchy, and clean-tasting. If you've written off coleslaw as heavy or gloppy, this fresh version will change your mind. It's also a perfect make-ahead side. Bonus: I've included 7 tasty variations so you'll never get bored with coleslaw.

    Round white bowl of colorful coleslaw with carrots and parsley.

    Coleslaw is the classic warm weather salad to accompany everything on your summer menu from grilled chicken and seafood to pulled pork, tacos and burgers. And cabbage is not only super budget friendly, but it is packed with nutrients. Making homemade means you control the ingredients. No refined sugar, questionable oils (soy, canola, GMO), preservatives, or too much dressing.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Simple; just three ingredients plus the dressing.
    • Perfect summer side for grilled meats, seafood, and more.
    • This really is an easy coleslaw recipe, and you can prep it ahead to save time.

    For another terrific summer salad, try this lemony Mediterranean pasta salad. So many good flavors.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Just 3 simple ingredients make the best, easy coleslaw recipe dressed with a creamy coleslaw dressing.

    ingredients to make simple coleslaw, carrots, cabbage, and parsley.
    Coleslaw dressing ingredients in small glass prep bowls on the counter.

    Coleslaw

    • Cabbage: Green cabbage is best and always available at the store. Skip the bags of coleslaw mix as it's usually not as fresh as homemade, plus bagged stuff carries it's own issues.
    • Carrots: Standard orange carrots add color, crunch, and sweetness.
    • Herbs: Parsley keeps it fresh and simple. Use the Italian parsley for best flavor.

    Coleslaw Dressing

    • Mayonnaise: Use your favorite light tasting mayo. My favorite mayo is this brand in the soy-free. Find it in the refrigerated produce or dairy section of the store.
    • Sour cream: Either dairy or dairy-free for vegan.
    • Sweetener: Honey, maple syrup, agave syrup, or keto honey with monk fruit all work.
    • Mustard: Whole grain Dijon mustard for flavor and texture but the cream Dijon works too (or use both).
    • Prepared horseradish: Adds a little heat and flavor complexity.
    • Vinegar: Use apple cider vinegar or white vinegar for a little tang in the coleslaw dressing.
    • Celery seed: A little celery seed adds a great savory flavor undertone.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and quantities.

    For another classic creamy dressing, try my homemade Caesar salad dressing.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Add a little finely chopped shallot for texture and flavor.
    • Add a little thinly sliced purple cabbage for more color or napa cabbage for texture.
    • White pepper disappears better than black pepper.
    • For a vegan dressing, use all mayo or sub vegan sour cream.
    • Add other herbs. Tarragon is good, mint is refreshing, and dill is super.

    For another fun and colorful Asian inspired coleslaw salad with a cream almond butter dressing.

    How to Make Coleslaw

    There are two options on cutting cabbage for coleslaw: slice the cabbage by hand with a large chef's knife, or using the slicing blade in a food processor. Let me show you how to make this big green round head more manageable.

    Slicing Cabbage by Hand

    Slicing green cabbage on a light wood cutting board with a chef's knife.

    To cut cabbage by hand, lay the quarters flat on a cutting board and slice crosswise into very thin ribbons with a chef's sharp knife. For the carrots, grate with a hand grater and chop parsley by hand.

    • First, slice a little off of the core end so you have a flat surface.
    • Next, stand the cabbage on the now flat root end and cut it in half, top to bottom.
    • Cut the halves into halves again so you have quarters.
    • Lastly, trim out the core.

    Slicing Cabbage With a Food Processor

    A food processor bowl filled with thinly sliced green cabbage.

    Depending on the size of the food processor feed tube, cut the cabbage quarters in half again so they fit into the feed tube. Insert the thin slicing blade, put the cabbage chunks into the feed tube, sliced side down, and process through. If there are any bigger pieces of core, remove them.

    Chopped vegetables for coleslaw.

    To finish the coleslaw, grate the carrots by hand or in the food processor with the grating blade. Chop the parsley by hand. Add everything to a large bowl and toss together.

    Ingredients for coleslaw dressing ready to be mixed in a bowl.

    Combine all coleslaw dressing ingredients into a bowl.

    creamy salad dressing with a silver whisk in a small glass bow.

    Whisk until smooth and creamy, or use a blender.

    A glass bowl of sliced cabbage, carrots, and herbs waiting for dressing for coleslaw.

    Serving Suggestions

    This simple easy coleslaw recipe is a refreshing, crisp counterpart when you're serving anything barbecued from grilled meat, to ribs or seafood. It's terrific with burgers and tucked into tacos. Add a coleslaw to a pulled pork sandwich.

    Make it a bowl: fill a shallow bowl with coleslaw as a base, then top it with it with sliced grilled lemon chicken for an easy low-carb option. It's really versatile, and customizable! See coleslaw flavor variations below.

    7 Coleslaw Variations

    What are some creative add-ins for coleslaw? Try these fun and tasty variations.

    • For Mexican style, swap cilantro for parsley, squeeze in lime juice and add sliced jalapeños. Another good addition is thin slices of colorful red and orange bell peppers or radishes. A little cumin in the dressing is good too.
    • For a colorful coleslaw add thinly sliced red cabbage, thinly sliced red and yellow bell pepper.
    • For pineapple coleslaw, add finely chopped pineapple (drained if juicy) and sliced green onions, add ginger puree to the dressing. For crunch top with a sprinkle of shredded coconut.
    • For Middle Eastern coleslaw, skip the dijon and add rose harissa, ground cumin and smoked paprika to the dressing.
    • Make it vegan with vegan sour cream, egg-free mayo, and maple, agave or keto syrup.
    • Make it an apple slaw with julienne strips of Granny Smith apple.
    • Make it a Napa cabbage slaw by substituting half Napa cabbage.
    Small bowls of colorful coleslaw with an orange fork.

    Coleslaw FAQs

    Is coleslaw healthy?

    To keep coleslaw healthy, don't over do the dressing. Start by adding less than you think it needs as you can always add more versus over-dressing it. Dressing typically has a lot of fat and calories. Making homemade coleslaw dressing also helps as you control the ingredients.

    Make it about the veggies using plenty of cabbage, carrots and fresh herbs. Another dressing tip, try sweetening the dressing with a healthy alternative to sugar such as monk fruit or monk fruit honey.


    What are the best types of cabbage for coleslaw?

    While standard green cabbage is classic for making coleslaw, adding a little red cabbage adds beautiful color. Using some Napa cabbage or savoy cabbage along with the green cabbage adds nice texture.

    Can you make coleslaw ahead of time?

    Coleslaw is a terrific make ahead recipe. Slice the cabbage, grate carrots, and chop fresh herbs a day ahead of time and refrigerate in an airtight container until serving. To serve, toss the veggies together with dressing. Dress either just before serving or up to a few hours ahead of time.

    More Terrific Salad Recipes

    Looking for more salad recipe ideas? Check out the salad recipe index for lots of tasty options.

    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Lemony Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe
    • Watermelon salad ready to serve with cucumber, feta, basil, shallots.
      Easy Watermelon Basil Salad with Feta Cheese
    • Broccoli bacon salad
      Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this simple easy coleslaw recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    White shallow bowl stilled with green cabbage coleslaw, carrots, and parsley with a light dressing.

    Simple Easy Coleslaw Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    The quintessential, go-with-everything, budget friendly summer salad. Green cabbage is the star. See notes at the end for 7 fun flavor variations.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 58 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food Processor optional

    Ingredients
      

    Coleslaw Dressing (yield about 1 cup, makes extra)

    • ½ cup your favorite mayo I use Vegenaise no-soy
    • ¼ cup sour cream dairy or vegan
    • 1-2 tablespoons honey sub maple syrup, agave or keto honey
    • 1 tablespoon whole grain Dijon mustard
    • 1 tablespoon prepared horseradish optional
    • 2 teaspoons apple cider vinegar
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper ground black or white

    Instructions
     

    Make the Coleslaw Dressing (Yield 1 cup/makes extra)

    • Place all ingredients in a bowl and whisk until blended or use a blender so it's smooth. Taste is and adjust for more salt, pepper, mustard, etc.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1tablespoonCalories: 58kcalCarbohydrates: 4gProtein: 0.3gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 6mgSodium: 219mgPotassium: 24mgFiber: 0.2gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 56IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 11mgIron: 0.1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Roasted Beets in Foil (Easy Oven Method)

    10/07/2012 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    Colorful red and golden roasted beets in aluminum foil.

    If you've never roasted beets in foil, you're in for a treat. This simple oven method transforms earthy, raw beets into tender, caramelized gems. Roasting them whole in foil locks in their sweetness and color while keeping cleanup easy. Once roasted, the skins slip right off, leaving you with perfectly cooked beets ready for salads, side dishes, or snacking.

    Red and gold beets roasting in aluminum foil with oil.

    Roasting beets in foil is one of the easiest and best ways to cook them. The foil creates a mini steam oven inside the packet, helping the beets cook evenly while intensifying their natural sweetness and keeping them moist. This simple method always delivers tender, flavorful beets and is my favorite way to prepare them. Just one tip: pick up a box of disposable kitchen gloves before you start. They'll save your hands from staining while you peel.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Roasted Beets in Foil

    • Fresher flavor: Oven-roasted beets taste better than the pre-steamed packages.
    • No-mess method: Wrapping them in foil keeps the juices contained and makes cleanup easy.
    • Simple and hands-off: Just wrap, roast, and peel - no fancy tools required.

    Serve roasted beets alongside roast chicken breasts with cashew gravy as a complimentary side dish.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Beets: Fresh, raw beets of any color. Beets with the tops still on are the best beets as they are are fresher and have more moisture and flavor than beets with tops removed. I usually buy medium beets in size. Try to buy the approximately the same size so they roast at the same time.
    • Oil: I use extra virgin olive oil, avocado oil, or a healthy neutral oil (but not vegetable oil).

    Please see the recipe card for measurement, salt and pepper.

    Chef's tip: Roasting beets in foil (double layer) prevents beet juices from leaking onto the baking sheet, making cleanup much easier. Timing for roasting beets depends on their size. Larger beets take longer; smaller beets roast faster.

    Add roasted beets in foil to this kale and roast vegetable salad, or make this beet salad with feta cheese.

    How to Roast Beets in Foil

    Pre-heat the oven to 400°F. To prepare to roast beets, trim beet tops leaving about 1 inch of stem then scrub clean under cold water with a vegetable brush. Discard beet greens unless you enjoy them sautéed.

    Red and gold beet in aluminum foil packets drizzled with oil and salt.
    Step 1: Place a double thickness of heavy duty foil on the counter, place whole beets in a single layer, drizzle with oil, sprinkle with salt. 
    Aluminum foil packets on a rimmed baking sheet on the counter.
    Step 2: Wrap beets into a tightly sealed packet and place on a baking sheet. Roast beets in the foil packet for 40-60 minutes, depending on size.
    Roasted beets in foil with a thin metal skewer piercing one to show they are done.
    Step 3: Roasted beets are done when easily pierced through with a thin metal skewer or thin paring knife.
    A gloved hand holding a peeled red beet with a paring knife and a y-vegetable peeler.
    Step 4: Skin beets using a vegetable peeler, a paring knife, or by rubbing of with paper towels while still warm.
    Gloved hand showing a skinned beet rubbed off with paper towels.
    Using paper towels to rub beet skins off.
    An oval bowl with roasted red and gold beets ready to enjoy.
    Roasted beets, skinned and ready to enjoy.

    How to Peel Beets

    Here are the three methods I've used to peel beets. After roasting beets in foil while they are still warm, trim the top of the beet flat, then peel beets by:

    • Rubbing with paper towels until they are smooth.
    • Using a vegetable peeler. I think inexpensive y-peelers do the best job.
    • Scraping the skin off with a sharp paring knife. 

    Beets have high staining power, so handle them with care. Wear a full cover apron (preferably not white!) and have paper towels handy. 

    Disposable food handler gloves are your best friend when working with beets as they prevent your hands from staining. Buy a box on Amazon or at a kitchen supply store. I use gloves often when working with raw ground meat and high stain foods. They are handy for many things.

    Chef's tip on cutting boards: While many people like plastic cutting boards, when working with high stain foods like beets they can stain. I have one I use for photography, but I work on these black Richlite cutting boards. They don't stain, they are available in good sizes as well as custom sizes, are easy to handle, they are durable and knife-friendly.

    A tan plate of roasted gold and deep purple-red beets on lettuce leaves.

    Serving Ideas for Roasted Beets

    • Add to salads: Chopped roasted beets pair beautifully with goat cheese or feta, toasted nuts, and fresh herbs for a colorful, nutrient-rich salad.
    • Serve simply: Enjoy roasted beets as a warm or chilled side dish with a drizzle of extra virgin olive oil, a splash of balsamic vinegar, and chopped herbs such as chives, parsley, or dill.
    • Toss with vinaigrette: Try a French vinaigrette made with olive oil, Dijon mustard, and vinegar. The mustard enhances the earthy sweetness of the beets.
    • Blend into smoothies: For something unexpected, swap banana for beet in this Raspberry Smoothie and add a touch of natural sweetener.
    • Add to grain bowls: Combine roasted beets with quinoa, rice, or farro, along with greens, nuts, and a tangy dressing for a hearty plant-based meal.
    • Make beet hummus: Blend roasted beets into classic hummus for a stunning pink color and subtly sweet flavor.

    Here is another salad idea for using roast beets, my kale salad with roast vegetables.

    Storage Tips

    Cut the cooled beets into quarters (or smaller) and refrigerate them for 4-5 days in an airtight container. It's best to use glass and not plastic as beets have high staining power and the plastic may not come clean.

    For longer storage, slice or dice and freeze on a parchment-lined tray before transferring to a freezer-safe container or bag. Frozen roasted beets will keep well for up to 3 months - perfect for adding to salads, soups, or grain bowls later.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do I need to peel beets before roasting?

    No, you don't need to peel beets before roasting. Simply trim the stems and leaves to about one inch, wash thoroughly, and scrub them clean. Roasting beets in foil loosens the skins naturally, so after roasting, they slip right off with just a paper towel or your gloved hands.

    Are roasted beets healthy?

    Yes! Beets are packed with nutrients - they're a great source of folate, magnesium, potassium, vitamin C, and dietary fiber. You'll often find deep red beets year-round, with golden and candy-striped Chioggia varieties appearing seasonally. Whichever color you choose, roasted beets are a naturally sweet, antioxidant-rich vegetable that supports detoxification and overall health.

    How long does it take to roast beets?

    Cooking time depends on the size of the beets and your oven temperature. Roast whole beets at 400°F, wrapped in a double layer of foil with a drizzle of olive oil and a sprinkle of salt and pepper. Check for doneness around 45 minutes by piercing one with a thin skewer or cake tester-it should slide through easily when fully cooked. Larger beets may need up to 60 minutes, while baby or small beets will cook faster.

    More How-to Recipes

    Love learning kitchen basics and pro techniques? Here are a few step-by-step guides to help you cook with more confidence and ease. Each one includes chef tips and simple methods you can master in your own kitchen.

    • Beautoful orange salmon fillets after skinning, on a wax paper covered tray.
      How to Skin Salmon (Step-by-Step Guide)
    • A glass bowl of perfectly diced tomatoes on a cutting board.
      Easy Steps for How to Dice a Tomato
    • Homemade Mayonnaise| A FoodCentricLife.com
      Homemade Mayonnaise in a Blender
    • A jar of golden clarified butter on a marble counter with a strainer beside.
      How to Make Clarified Butter

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make roasted beets in foil, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Colorful red and golden roasted beets in aluminum foil.

    Roasted Beets in Foil

    Sally Cameron
    Beets become sweet when roasted and are wonderful as a side dish or added to salads.  If you enjoy dairy, roast beets are delicious with goat cheese, orange segments, a sprinkle of pine nuts and a little chopped fresh mint. Serve on their own or atop salad greens or with micro greens.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 6 servings
    Calories 91 kcal

    Equipment

    • Foil for roasting
    • Rimmed baking sheet
    • Disposable kitchen gloves
    • Thin metal skewer or cake tester

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ - 2 pounds raw beets with tops about 5 medium beets
    • 2 teaspoons olive oil
    • salt to taste

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat oven to 400 degrees. Trim off the beet leaves and stems to within 1-inch of the beet. Scrub beets under cold water and dry them with paper towels.
    • Place a double thickness of heavy aluminum foil on the counter, large enough to hold the beets. Place beets in the center, drizzle with oil and a sprinkle of salt and wrap tightly into a foil packet.
      Place packet in the oven and roast until beets are cooked through and tender. Use a thin metal skewer (like a turkey lacer or pins) or a metal cake tester. They should easily pierce through the beets when ready.Test beets at 45 minutes. Continue about 15 minutes longer if needed. Timing will depend on the size of the beets.
    • Remove beet packet from the oven and cool a few minutes. Slice off the top where the stem was. When beets are cool enough to handle, unwrap and peel one of three ways: rub off with paper towels, use a y-vegetable peeler, or a sharp paring knife. Be sure to wear disposable gloves.
      Beets are ready to eat or add to a salad or other recipe. Beets will last 4-5 days, covered, in the refrigerator.

    Notes

    Serving ideas: Add beets to a tossed green salad with goat cheese (skip for vegans). Add orange segments, pine nuts, and chopped mint leaves for more color and flavor. Dress with a light vinaigrette made with olive oil and white Balsamic vinegar or Champagne vinegar.
    To serve beets as a side dish, sprinkle with chopped chives and drizzle with olive oil, salt and pepper.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 91kcalCarbohydrates: 16gProtein: 3gFat: 2gSaturated Fat: 0.3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gSodium: 133mgPotassium: 553mgFiber: 5gSugar: 11gVitamin A: 56IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 27mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Gluten-Free Carrot Cake Muffins (dairy-free)

    03/25/2018 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    carrot cake muffins

    These gluten free carrot cake muffins deliver light and fluffy muffins that are gluten-free, dairy-free, and grain-free, yet so delicious that no one would guess. Sweetened with maple syrup, not refined sugar, these carrot cake muffins are a hit with everyone. Perfect for breakfast or an afternoon snack, they are super easy to make and last the better part of a week wrapped on the kitchen counter, plus they freeze. You've got to make a batch.

    carrot cake muffin on a silver plate.

    My Aunt Rose made a mean carrot cake, and it's still one of my all-time favorites. But as my diet evolved-shifting toward healthier and gluten-free choices-I found myself baking less. Then I discovered how beautifully almond flour and coconut flour work together. After a few rounds of testing, I created these gluten-free carrot cake muffins that check all the boxes: light, flavorful, naturally sweetened, and incredibly easy to make.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • A healthier muffin recipe, versus using white flour and white sugar.
    • You can even frost them with cream cheese frosting like cupcakes.
    • Gluten-free, dairy-free, grain-free, but no one would ever guess. They're fantastic.
    • Paleo carrot cake muffins (if you follow paleo).

    For more terrific gluten-free muffins, try this Gluten-free zucchini muffins recipe. 

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Almond flour blend: Use Bob's Red Mill  paleo blend flour, a blend of almond flour and coconut flour.
    • Baking powder: Use aluminum-free baking powder, be sure to check the expiration date.
    • Baking soda: Another leavening agent in baking, check the expiration date.
    • Spices: I blend ground cinnamon, ground ginger, and ground nutmeg.
    • Eggs: For binding and moisture. Large, clean, un-cracked eggs.
    • Oil: I use melted coconut oil . If coconut is a problem, use avocado oil.
    • Maple syrup: Use the real deal, not the fake colored stuff made of corn syrup.
    • Shredded coconut: Finely shredded unsweetened coconut (omit for coconut allergy).
    • Vanilla: Use real vanilla extract or vanilla bean paste.
    • Carrots: Fresh carrots. Use the orange ones. 

    Please see the recipe card for all measurements.

    Another terrific muffin recipe is this one for strawberry muffins with fresh strawberries (gluten-free too).

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vegetable oil is another option, but not standard grocery store "vegetable" oil. It is so unhealthy and highly processed. Use this clean healthy neutral oil instead. It's what I use for a neutral oil.
    • A nice substitution for all of the individual spices is Chinese Five Spice blend. You still get cinnamon, but the flavor is just a little different, in a nice way.
    • Add ½ cup of chopped walnuts or golden raisins.
    • Use pumpkin pie spice blend. 

    Chef's tip on oil: I don't recommend using standard grocery store vegetable oils (ever), which are typically made from GMO soy, corn, and canola, then processed with high heat and chemicals, bleached and deodorized. Not healthy! Better options with healthy fats are avocado oil, melted coconut oil, or Zero Acre Farms oil-cleaner choices that support both flavor and wellness (not an affiliate link).

    How to Make Carrot Cake Muffins

    Muffin batter in a silver muffin pan for baking.
    1. Pre-heat the oven to 350°F and spray a 12-cup muffin tin (skip the paper liners).
    2. Peel carrots then grate on the large holes on a box grater or food processor with grating disc.
    3. Blend all dry ingredients in a large bowl with a whisk.
    4. Blend wet ingredients, the eggs, oil, syrup, water and vanilla. Whisk until smooth.
    5. Add the dry ingredients to the wet mixture and stir to create muffin batter.
    6. Fold in carrots and coconut. Divide batter evenly between the muffin cups. Sprinkle tops with extra coconut if desired.
    7. Bake muffins about 25 minutes until golden on top and a toothpick comes out clean with moist crumbs.
    8. Cool 10 minutes then remove from the pan and cool completely on wire rack.
    Baked muffins.

    Serving and Storing

    Gluten-free carrot cake muffins are perfect for:

    • Breakfast or brunch with coffee or a smoothie.
    • An afternoon snack with tea or almond milk.
    • Packed into lunchboxes for a naturally sweet treat.
    • Topped with dairy-free cream cheese or a dollop of Greek yogurt for a carrot-cake feel.
    • Warmed and split open with butter.

    Carrot cake muffins last about 4-5 days at room temperature if well wrapped, or you can freeze them for up to 2 months. Be sure to label and date.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do I need to peel the carrots first?

    Yes, it's best to peel carrots. The skin can be a bit tough or bitter and doesn't soften as nicely in baking.

    Can I use pre-shredded carrots?

    You can, but freshly grated carrots have more moisture and blend better into the batter. Pre-shredded carrots are sometimes dry and coarse for muffins.

    How sweet are these muffins?

    They're lightly sweetened with maple syrup, just enough to bring out the natural sweetness of the carrots and spices without being sugary.

    Can I make these without eggs?

    Yes! You can try using flax eggs, a chia egg, or an egg replacer. The texture may be a little softer, but they still bake up nicely.

    Carrot cake muffins cooling on a rack with coffee.

    More Gluten-Free Baking Recipes

    Love to bake? Try some of these terrific treats, all gluten-free, of course.

    • A single layer sweet cherry cake with golden top on white plate.
      Easy One-Pan Cherry Cake with Fresh Cherries
    • A golden slice of lemon olive oil cake, made wit whole almonds, served with berries and glaze.
      Super Moist Lemon Olive Oil Cake Recipe
    • Pumpkin snack cake with chocolate chips.
      Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cake (Snack Cake)
    • A beautiful lemon tart with piles of piped meringue on top of a cake plate.
      Lemon Meringue Tart Recipe

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make these carrot cake muffins, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    carrot cake muffins

    Carrot Cake Muffins (gluten free)

    Sally Cameron
    These light textured, delicious muffins are grain-free, gluten-free, dairy-free, and refined sugar-free, sweetened with maple syrup. They make a great breakfast addition or snack. 
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12
    Calories 190 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Dry Ingredients

    • 2 ⅔ cups Bobs Red Mill Paleo Flour Blend 12 ounces
    • 2 ¾ teaspoons aluminum-free baking powder
    • 1 ¾ teaspoons cinnamon or Chinese Five Spice blend
    • 1 ½ teaspoons baking soda
    • ¾ teaspoons ground ginger
    • ¼ teaspoon grated nutmeg
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt

    Wet Ingredients

    • 4 large eggs
    • ½ cup + 1 tablespoon melted coconut oil avocado oil or neutral oil, note below
    • ½ cup + 1 tablespoon maple syrup
    • ½ cup water
    • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract or vanilla bean paste
    • 1 ¾ cups lightly packed grated carrots 8 ounces
    • ½ cup finely shredded unsweetened coconut + extra for optional topping

    Optional add-ins

    • ½ cup chopped walnuts
    • ½ cup raisins

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F. With a little extra coconut oil or non-stick spray, grease the wells of a 12-cup light colored metal muffin pan. Wash, peel, and grate carrots on the large hole size of a box grater or in a food processor.
    • Add the dry ingredients to a medium bowl, flour, baking powder, cinnamon, baking soda, ginger, nutmeg and salt and whisk well to combine.
      To another bowl add the wet ingredients, the eggs, oil, syrup, water and vanilla. Whisk until smooth and combined.
    • Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients and mix well. Fold in the carrots and coconut. Divide batter evenly between the 12 muffin cups. Sprinkle tops with extra coconut if desired.
      Bake muffins approximately 25 minutes, until muffins are golden on top and a toothpick comes out clean with moist crumbs when inserted into the center of the muffin. Timing may vary with your ovens. 
    • When muffins are done, remove pan from the oven and allow muffins to cool 10 minutes in the pan, then gently remove them to a wire rack to cool completely. Muffins will last about 4 days in an airtight container on the countertop.

    Notes

    For extra pretty muffins, garnish the tops with an extra sprinkle of coconut before baking. If you prefer to serve them as cupcakes and plan to frost, skip anything on top before baking. 
    A note on oils:
    Skip vegetable oil in anything! Instead, I suggest healthier options like avocado oil, melted coconut oil, or Zero Acre Farms oil—cleaner choices that support both flavor and wellness. Unfortunately you have to order it online but it's worth it. (not an affiliate link).

    Nutrition

    Calories: 190kcalCarbohydrates: 12gProtein: 3gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 62mgSodium: 297mgPotassium: 146mgFiber: 2gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 3209IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 102mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Homemade BBQ Spice Rub

    05/13/2024 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Savory dry rub for grilling with spices and a little brown sugar.

    This easy homemade BBQ spice rub is my go-to all-purpose seasoning for grilling, smoking, roasting, or even the air fryer. It adds bold, smoky-sweet flavor to chicken, pork, ribs, fish, and veggies-whatever you're cooking. Made from pantry spices, it's easy to mix, easy to love, and far better than store-bought. Plus, you control the ingredients-no preservatives or mystery additives.

    A glass jar of bright brick red colored dry rub spice blend.

    I developed this BBQ spice rub (also called a dry rub) over a decade ago and finally published it for friends who love to grill, and now it's yours too. It truly is all-purpose: sprinkle or rub it generously onto whatever's headed for the grill, smoker, oven, or air fryer. If you're someone who likes to make your own "stuff" and control what goes into your food (like I do), this homemade BBQ spice rub is easy to whip up easily and customizable.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This BBQ Spice Rub

    • You control the flavor - Adjust the salt, heat, and sweetness to suit your needs.
    • Versatile and all-purpose - Great on chicken, pork, seafood, veggies. Use it for grilling, roasting, smoking, or air frying.
    • Clean ingredients - No fillers, preservatives, MSG, or artificial flavors-just pure spices.

    For another homemade spice blend, try my homemade taco seasoning to make ground beef taco filling or for turkey and chicken, try this flavorful turkey rub.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Spices for a BBQ dry rub on white plates.

    Here is what you need to make this BBQ spice rub. Find spices at most grocery stores and from online spice stores.

    • Smoked paprika: For an earthy, savory, smoky flavor.
    • Granulated garlic: Granulated is coarser in texture than garlic powder, but both are made from pure, dehydrated garlic. For great flavor. Look at the bottle to see what the texture is because the names vary.
    • Brown sugar: For a little caramelization and sweetness. Use either light brown sugar, dark brown sugar, or a coarse brown sugar like turbinado.
    • Ground cumin: For it's earthy, slightly spiced flavor common in spice blends.
    • Ground coriander: A great partner for cumin, with a lightly lemony flavor.
    • Onion powder: Another savory flavor builder.
    • Ancho chili powder: This is pure chili powder, not the blend called chili powder.
    • Ground black pepper: For some heat. Smoked black pepper is good too.
    • Chipotle pepper: For more heat! Made from smoked jalapeno peppers, it adds to the smoky flavor along with the smoked paprika.

    But what about the salt? See my notes below, and please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Instead of plain paprika on top of creamy deviled eggs, use this BBQ spice rub. It's a flavorful garnish.

    Chef's Tip: What's a BBQ Rub?
    A BBQ rub is a dry blend of spices, herbs, and sugar that adds flavor and helps create that crave-worthy crust (or bark) on grilled or smoked meats. A wet rub is simply a dry rub with added moisture-think olive oil, vinegar, beer, bourbon, mustard, mayo, or citrus juice.

    Spice dry rub on a spoon over a jar of the rub.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If you prefer salt in your BBQ spice rub, add 1-2 tablespoons of kosher salt; 1 for a balanced flavor and 2 for a more salt-forward rub.
    • Substitute regular sweet paprika for smoked paprika.
    • Use a smoked salt, either in the rub recipe or when you salt your meat.
    • To substitute garlic powder (which is finer) for granulated garlic, use ¾ as much.
    • Substitute cayenne pepper for chipotle pepper, and for more heat, add more to your liking but be careful.
    • Add dried herbs such as dried thyme or dried oregano, try 2-3 teaspoons and crush it in your hands before adding.
    • No coriander? Skip it and use a little more cumin.
    • Switch coconut sugar or golden monk fruit blend for the brown sugar.
    • Want it sweeter? Add a little more brown sugar.

    Use this dry rub in place of plain paprika in this easy, creamy smoked salmon dip.

    What About Salt?

    The first ingredient in most dry rubs is salt, and they can be up to 50% salt! And you don't know what kind of salt, the quality or where it came from.

    While salt is critical for flavor in cooking, I leave the salt out of my BBQ spice rub. Why? For more control. I prefer to salt my meat separately or whatever it is I am preparing. I can also use different kinds of salt. For smoking and my pellet grill, I often use a smoked salt blend.

    Another reason I skip the salt in the dry rub is that many folks are salt-sensitive or on a medically restrictive diet, so this gives them a great, versatile dry rub option. 

    What kind of salt should I add if I want to? Most people use kosher salt for it's coarse and crunchy texture in dry rubs or BBQ spice rubs. You can also use fine pink sea salt BUT please read on...

    My Preferred Salts and Why

    You will find three primary salts in my kitchen: coarse kosher sea salt, fine pink salt, and a coarse or kosher pink seal salt.

    The first is a Mediterranean coarse kosher sea salt for it's texture and clean flavor. It's also what I use for brining and salting water for blanching, boiling, and sometimes salting meat. Another great kosher salt is this mined pink kosher salt.

    The other salt I use is this fine, clean, pink mined ancient sea salt. These are my workhorse salts.

    My favorite recipes to use BBQ spice rub on? Smoked 3-2-1 baby back ribs and my rotisserie chicken.

    How to Make BBQ Spice Rub

    A glass jar of spices ready to be shaken to make a dry rub.

    Add all of the spices to a jar and shake well, label and store in a cool, dry, dark place for up to 6 months.

    Chef's tip: Where not to store spices? In full light, on top of your stove, beside the stove, or above the range. Heat and light makes the flavors and strength of the spices degrade more quickly.

    Golden grilled chicken breasts done with dry rub just finishing on the grill.

    Ways to Use This Spice Rub

    A rack of baby back ribs coated in dry rub, ready for the grill.

    Use BBQ spice rub recipe on raw proteins, such as chicken, turkey, ribs, pork tenderloin and chops, seafood, burgers and beef. Use them as a finishing seasoning for vegetables, potatoes, and flavoring vinaigrettes, dressings, and marinades. They are multi-purpose and versatile. Try out these recipes!

    • Baby back ribs. Rub the ribs both top and under sides with a generous amount of dry rub. I start the night before to allow the flavors to develop (but you don't have to).
    • Grilled shrimp tacos.
    • Baked bone-in chicken breasts (or pellet grill).
    • Air fryer roasted red potatoes.
    • It's wonderful on buttered popcorn!
    • Use it just about any where you would use paprika.
    • Add it to a marinade with olive oil and citrus juices.
    • Use BBQ spice rub for rotisserie chicken.
    • A jar makes a great gift for your grilling and pellet grill friends!

    The photo below is a dry rub coated whole chicken I put on the rotisserie. Comes out fantastic! The trick to getting the rub to stick is smearing the bird with just a little mayonnaise to start, then coating well with the dry rub.

    Rotisserie chicken coated in dry rub on the grill spit.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is a Dry Rub?

    A dry rub is a blend of dry spices, herbs, sugar, and usually salt used to flavor foods. There is no liquids and no oil like marinades and sauces. You can leave out the salt to control the amount of salt used in a recipe and instead, salt the meat or seafood separately. Dry rubs are super versatile, fun to use, easy to create at home, and give recipes lots of flavor.

    Are there any health concerns with using dry rubs?

    One of the main concern with purchased dry rubs is the level of salt. Many are mostly salt with little else. You've got to read labels. The first few ingredients listed are what the rub is mainly made of, and it often starts with salt. Another concern is preservatives, gluten or other allergens, and ingredients to make rubs flow and not clump. Making dry rubs at home eliminates these challenges.

    Can you use a dry rub on vegetables?

    You can use dry rubs on vegetables too. Use them to season the vegetables after cooking as you would salt or toss, spray, or lightly coat the vegetables with a little oil and toss with the dry rub before cooking. Be careful with high heat as you don't want to burn the spices.

    What are some common mistakes to avoid when using dry rubs?

    Watch the salt levels in rubs so your food is not overly salty. Making dry rubs at home allows you to control or eliminate the amount salt. Also, spices can burn with too high heat. Watch your cooking and grilling temperatures and timing so dry rubbed food does not burn, especially with a direct contact method of cooking.

    Recipes To Try With Dry Rub

    Dry rubs are fun to play with to bring a new dimension of flavors to recipes. Wherever you use a spice blend, experiment with a dry rub.

    • Oven baby back ribs glazed with rich brown hoisin sauce.
      Baby Back Ribs Recipe (Oven Method)
    • spicy grilled shrimp tacos
      Baja Shrimp Tacos (Grill or Stovetop)
    • White bowl of golden browned air fryer red potatoes with rosemary.
      Air Fryer Red Potatoes (or oven roasted)
    • Smoked baby back ribs being sliced on a sheet tray with BBQ sauce.
      3-2-1 Ribs (Smoked Baby Back Ribs Recipe)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this dry rub, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Savory dry rub for grilling with spices and a little brown sugar.

    BBQ Spice Rub

    Sally Cameron
    Don't buy dry rubs, make your own! I use this on chicken, shrimp, ribs, pork tenderloin, just about anything with delicious results. See notes below for options and substitutions. Doubles easily for a big batch.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Seasoning
    Cuisine American
    Servings 24 Yield 1 cup/5.7 oz
    Calories 15 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 ½ tablespoons smoked paprika
    • 3 tablespoons granulated garlic or 1 ½ T. of garlic powder
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar or coconut sugar or golden monk fruit blend
    • 1 ½ tablespoons ground cumin
    • 1 ½ tablespoons ground coriander
    • 1 tablespoon ancho chili powder
    • 1 tablespoon ground black pepper or smoked black pepper
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • ¼-1/2 teaspoon chipotle powder or cayenne pepper

    Optional: Salt

    • 1 tablespoon kosher salt

    Instructions
     

    • Measure all ingredients into a jar with a tight lid and shake hard until well combined. Label and date when you made it and store in a cool dark pantry or cabinet. Will last 4-6 months.

    Notes

    • Like it spicier? Add more chipotle powder, cayenne pepper, or some sharp (hot) paprika.
    • If you use garlic powder instead of granulated garlic, start with half the amount as it is finer. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2teaspoonsCalories: 15kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 1gFat: 0.4gSaturated Fat: 0.1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.2gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gSodium: 8mgPotassium: 65mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 758IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 13mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Gluten-Free Irish Soda Bread

    02/13/2012 by Sally Cameron 18 Comments

    Golden baked loaf of Irish soda bread, sliced on a white plate.

    Bake up a golden, hearty loaf of this easy gluten-free Irish soda bread-perfect for St. Patrick's Day or any day. If baking bread sounds intimidating, don't worry! This classic yeast-free quick bread requires no kneading or rising time, making it simple enough for anyone to make. Just mix, shape, bake, and enjoy my gluten-free, modern take on traditional soda bread.

    A sliced loaf of Irish soda bread with currants on a cooling rack.

    This gluten free Irish soda bread is a simple, modern take on the classic. It keeps traditional buttermilk for flavor and rise but adds a little of butter and sugar for richness. Currants (or raisins) bring subtle sweetness, making it just as delicious alongside a meal or toasted with butter. With no yeast or complicated steps, it's an easy, foolproof recipe for any level of baker. I'll show you with step-by-step photos.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Gluten-Free Irish Soda Bread Highlights

    • An easy gluten-free soda bread recipe.
    • One bowl, little mess, simple ingredients.
    • A "quick" bread; no yeast to deal with and no kneading of the dough.
    • There's nothing like homemade bread!

    For more ideas St. Patrick's Day recipe ideas, try this savory braised cabbage with leeks and bacon. It's so good!

    Ingredients You'll Need

    The perfect gluten-free alternative to traditional Irish soda bread.

    Irish soda bread ingredients with labels on a counter.
    • Gluten-free flour blend: I use King Arthur Measure for Measure GF blend. You need a little extra for your hands and cutting board. They are based on rice flour vs. cornstarch.
    • Sugar: Use a natural granulated sugar for the soda bread. It's just a small amount and makes a lightly sweet quick bread.
    • Baking powder: Use aluminum-free baking powder and check expiration the date on your can or bag before baking. Baking powder is one leavening agent instead of yeast.
    • Baking soda: Check expiration the date on your can or bag before baking as it's another natural leavening agent for baked goods without yeast.
    • Butter: Use sweet or unsalted butter. Irish butter is good but use what you have.
    • Buttermilk: Buttermilk gives baked goods a light, moist texture. It's natural the acidity reacts with the baking soda and powder to help the bread rise. See substitutions for buttermilk below.
    • Dried fruit: Some recipe use raisins, I prefer tiny currants which are another kind of dried grape. What you'll find at the grocery store are called currants or Zantes currants.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's tip: If your gluten-free flour blend does not contain xanthan gum, add ½ of a teaspoon to the recipe. It provides elasticity and stickiness to gluten-free doughs and batters (because there is no gluten).

    Substitutions and Variations

    Substitutes for Buttermilk

    If you don't have buttermilk, use dairy milk plus lemon juice to curdle the milk and create the needed acidity. Another option, milk and apple cider vinegar or white vinegar. Other options include sour cream, yogurt, kefir, or rehydrated buttermilk powder (which I now keep on hand in my pantry).

    I've not tested all of these options but the milk and lemon juice or vinegar trick does work. For more information, read here for more about substitutions for buttermilk.

    For dairy-free, use homemade almond milk or homemade cashew milk, still adding the lemon juice and using a plant butter (a cube not a tub). The taste may be a little different as buttermilk as a natural tang.

    Other Substitutes

    • If you are egg sensitive, Irish soda bread can be made with no egg or an egg replacement. Either skip the egg (I used to make it that way) or find ideas for replacing the egg here.
    • To reduce sugar, use a monk fruit blend like this one. I always have a bag in the pantry and it works great to replace sugar, either all of it or even half and half.
    • If you can't find dried currants (tiny raisins), substitute regular raisins, golden raisins, dried cranberries, finely chopped pitted dates, chopped dried cherries or dried blueberries. 

    How to Make Gluten-Free Irish Soda bread

    This dough comes together quickly. If you've never baked bread like this, it's really easy and comes out wonderful. Some Irish soda bread recipes start with 3-4 cups of flour for big loaves. My recipe uses just 2 cups of flour for a smaller loaf that still serves 8-10.

    Step 1: Mix the dry ingredients for soda bread in a bowl.

    Step 1: Mix the dry ingredients together in a medium bowl and stir well to combine.

    Step 2: Mix in the cold butter with a fork or pasty cutter.

    Step 2: Mix in the cold butter with a fork or pastry cutter.

    Step 3: Mix the wet and dry ingredients together.

    Step 3: Step 3: Make a well in the center of the dry ingredients and add the wet ingredients (buttermilk and egg). 

    Step 4: Mixing the dough for Irish soda bread.

    Step 4: Using a fork, gently mix it all together until a sticky dough forms.

    Step 5: Mix in the currants.

    Step 5: Mix in the currants.

    Step 6: Mixing in the currants.s.

    Step 6: Gently mix until a sticky dough forms.

    A round loaf of bread ready for baking..

    Step 7: Shape the dough into a free form round loaf on a floured cutting board. Parchment paper makes it easier to move to the pan.

    Step 8: Lastly, bake the bread in a round cake pan or on a baking sheet, using baking parchment under the dough. Bake at 350°F for 35-40 minutes until the loaf is golden and a cake tester inserted in the center comes out clean and warm. Cool on a wire rack for a few minutes before slicing.

    Chef's Tip: Cutting a shallow cross or X across the top of the bread (called scoring) with a sharp knife before baking the soda bread does two things: it assists baking as the heat reaches the interior of the loaf, and the cross blesses the bread (per Irish tradition). 

    Golden baked loaf of bread with currants, sliced.

    Should I Weigh or Measure Flour?

    My original recipe used whole wheat flour. Going gluten-free, I adapted my recipe and have tested with different GF blends. You can weigh your flour or use standard dry measuring utensils. What's the difference? Different brands of GF flour measure differently. For accuracy, weigh. A digital kitchen scale is an inexpensive buy.

    What if you don't weigh with a scale? The bread will still taste just as delicious, but might be a little more dense depending on what gluten-free all purpose flour you use. Be sure you stir your flour to aerate it before scooping and measuring.

    Serving Suggestions

    What do you eat Irish soda bread with? Keep it simple with soft butter and jam. Enjoy it for breakfast with eggs and fruit. Try it at lunch with soup or a salad, or as an afternoon snack with a cup of tea.

    It makes a nice gift too. I used to bake it for my clients as a seasonal treat. Using a serrated knife for slicing makes it easier.

    Irish soda bread keeps for about 5 days on the counter, well wrapped in a zip bag or other airtight container.

    How to Store

    To store leftover Irish soda bread, store it at room temperature for up to two days wrapped in plastic wrap. For longer storage, wrap it tightly in plastic wrap and use a freezer bag, then reheat before serving.

    A platter of sliced golden Irish soda bread.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why is it called Irish soda bread?

    It's called a soda bread because baking soda is used as the leavening agent instead of yeast and kneading. It's called bread soda in Ireland. Irish soda bread is generally a lightly sweet bread made with butter, egg, and currants or caraway seeds. 

    Is Irish Soda Bread Irish?

    Some reports say there's nothing Irish about this bread, that it's an American invention or at least a corruption of the Irish traditional bread. In Ireland it's considered a basic bread. The link above has a fun article. I think of it having Irish heritage.

    Can I substitute baking powder for baking soda in soda bread?

    No, they are not the same thing. Baking soda reacts with the acidity of buttermilk to leaven the bread. Baking powder is both an acid and a base and you may not get result or flavor.

    More Easy Gluten-Free Baking Recipes

    For another gluten-free baking recipe that uses buttermilk, try this gluten-free cornbread recipe.

    • A single layer sweet cherry cake with golden top on white plate.
      Easy One-Pan Cherry Cake with Fresh Cherries
    • Gluten Free Strawberry Muffins
    • carrot cake muffins
      Gluten-Free Carrot Cake Muffins (dairy-free)
    • Gluten free banana bread
      The Best Gluten Free Banana Bread

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make gluten-free Irish soda bread, please comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Golden baked loaf of Irish soda bread, sliced on a white plate.

    Gluten-free Irish Soda Bread

    Sally Cameron
    A golden loaf studded with sweet dried currants, Irish soda bread goes together easily in just one bowl. Not just for St. Patrick's Day, this is a nice recipe to have in your file for any time of the year. It's nice served with apricot jam.  
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 40 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine American, Irish
    Servings 8
    Calories 215 kcal

    Equipment

    • digital kitchen scale OPTIONAL

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 cups gluten-free flour See notes at the end.
    • ¼ cup natural granulated sugar or monk fruit, or blend the two.
    • 1 ½ teaspoons aluminum free baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon sea salt
    • ¾ teaspoon baking soda
    • 3 tablespoons cold unsalted butter cut into small cubes
    • 1 cup buttermilk see substitutions below
    • ⅔ cup dried currants
    • 1 Large egg

    Instructions
     

    Pre-heat oven

    • Pre-heat oven to 350*F degrees. Spray or lightly oil a 9" round cake pan. Line the bottom with a round of baking parchment. Alternatively use baking parchment on a rimmed baking sheet, cookie sheet, or cast iron skillet.

    Mix the Dough

    • Into a medium bowl, measure the flour, sugar, baking powder, salt and baking soda. For accuracy, use a digital scale to weigh the flour or use dry measuring cups (see notes below). Whisk to combine or stir well with a fork. Add the cold butter cubes and with a fork or a pastry blender, mix in until the flour becomes a coarse pebbly mixture.
    • Push dry ingredients around the edge of the bowl and make a well in the center of the bowl. Pour buttermilk into the center, then add egg and whisk with a fork. until combined. Gradually stir the buttermilk and flour mixture together with the fork. The dough will be sticky. Stir in the currants.

    Shape the Loaf

    • Sprinkle your cutting board with a little extra flour to shape the dough. Place the dough onto the floured space and sprinkle the top of the dough with a little extra flour as well, but don't use too much. Shape the dough into a flat, round loaf about ¾ of an inch thick and 7 inches across.

    Bake the Bread

    • Transfer the dough to the cake pan and pat lightly to reshape if needed. It will not come to the edges of the pan. Sprinkle the top with an extra teaspoon of sugar (optional). Bake 35-40 minutes or until golden brown. Remove bread from the oven, cool in the pan 10 minutes then move the loaf to cool on a wire rack. Slice or crosswise or cut into wedges and enjoy.

    Notes

    • For King Arthur's Measure for Measure GF flour, 2 cups = 9 ounces. 
    • For Bob's Red Mill 1:1 GF flour, 1 ¾ cups + 1 tablespoon = 9 ounces. 
    • To measure flour, spoon the flour into the measuring cup and smooth off top of the cup with the flat edge of a table knife or similar tool. Do not scoop the flour from the bag as you'll get more than you need. 
    • Dried fruit options: Currants are widely available but you can substitute dried cranberries, chopped pitted dates, chopped dried cherries or dried blueberries.
    • If you are egg sensitive, this can be made with no egg or an egg replacement. 
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 215kcalCarbohydrates: 39gProtein: 4gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 15mgSodium: 490mgPotassium: 135mgFiber: 4gSugar: 16gVitamin A: 189IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 122mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Almond Flour Orange Cake (gluten-free)

    01/12/2010 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    orange almond cake

    With a delicate orange flavor and tender texture, this single layer almond flour orange cake is easy to make, and you don't have to boil oranges. Instead of frosting try a light dusting of powered sugar to finish. Orange flavored whipped cream or coconut cream would be good too. To save time make it a day ahead.

    orange almond cake with oranges

    Its is easy to forget that citrus is really a winter crop. With friends coming for dinner who love cake for dessert and my navel orange tree full of fruit, I turned to an old favorite recipe. I can't believe I've been making it for so many years, but now, gluten-free.

    orange almond cake side view
    Orange almond cake with orange slices, side view.

    Almond Flour Orange Cake Ingredients

    To reduce the sugar, use half granular stevia and half natural organic sugar, so 6 tablespoons of sugar and 3 tablespoons of granular stevia because stevia is much sweeter than sugar. Other options include monk fruit blend. For a good gluten-free flour blend try Bobs Red Mill. I grind my almonds in a food processor, although I've used what is called almond flour which are pure, finely ground almonds.

    For your shopping list:

    • Raw almonds 6 ounces, ground
    • Unsalted butter
    • Natural granulated sugar or monk fruit blend
    • Eggs
    • Gluten-free flour blend
    • Oranges for zest and juice
    • Ground coriander
    • Sea salt

    Almond Cake Tool Tips

    Hand mixer: As this recipe is for a single layer cake, the recipe makes a smaller amount of batter than a traditional double layer cake recipe so it is easily made with a hand mixer.

    Springform pan: You will need an 8″ springform pan. Springform pans make a nice addition to your kitchen tool collection. Get one that seals tight with the bottom. Once baked and cooled, release the spring and cakes are easy to remove. Find them at cooking stores and place like Bed Bath and Beyond. Here is one on Amazon.

    Parchment paper: Purchase backing parchment in any grocery store. Find it in the aisle next to the foil and plastic film. That is the heavier style. You can also buy pre-cut rounds and sheets of lighter weight parchment paper at cooking stores and online. Either work for this recipe.

    Fine sieve: For dusting the finished cake with powdered sugar, use a small, fine mesh sieve. Place the sugar in the sieve and shake it across the top of the cake. You can hit it against the side of your hand to get it to sprinkle.

    Orange almond torte | AFoodCentricLife.com

    📖 Recipe

    Orange almond torte | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Almond Flour Orange Cake (gluten-free)

    Sally Cameron
    Lightly sweet and fragrant with fresh orange, this orange almond torte is adapted from Bon Appétit Magazine. Use an all purpose gluten-free flour blend such as Bobs Red Mill.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Breakfast, Dessert, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 283 kcal

    Equipment

    • 8" springform pan
    • Baking parchment
    • Food processor (to grind almonds) or use almond meal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup raw almonds (6 ounces) or almond meal
    • ½ cup + 1 T unsalted butter at room temperature
    • ¾ cup monk fruit blend or natural granulated sugar
    • 1 large egg
    • 2 large egg yolks
    • ½ cup + 1 T gluten-free flour blend
    • 2 tablespoons orange juice fresh squeezed
    • 1 tablespoon orange zest
    • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
    • 1 pinch sea salt
    • 2 large egg whites at room temperature

    Optional Garnish

    • Powdered sugar for top of cake

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat oven to 375°F. Butter an 8-inch springform pan. Cut a circle of parchment (or use a pre-cut round) to fit inside and line the bottom of pan. Butter parchment; dust with flour.
    • Beat ½ cup butter in a large bowl until fluffy. Gradually add sugar, beating until blended. Add egg, then yolks, 1 at a time, beating well after each addition. At low speed, beat in almonds, flour, orange juice, zest, coriander and salt, scraping down sides of bowl occasionally.
    • Using clean dry beaters, beat egg whites in medium bowl until stiff but not dry. Stiff whites will hold a tip straight up when you turn your beaters upside down. Gently fold whites into batter in 2 additions with a flexible spatula. Transfer batter to prepared pan.
    • Bake cake until top is golden and a toothpick or cake tester inserted into the center comes out clean, 35-40 minutes. To be safe, check early as ovens vary. Cool cake in pan on rack. When cool release the spring and remove the cake from the pan.

    Notes

    To reduce sugar, use 6 tablespoons of natural organic sugar and 3 tablespoons of granular stevia or substitute with a monk fruit/erythritol blend per the package directions.
    Adapted long ago from an old issue of Bon Appetit.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 283kcalCarbohydrates: 14gProtein: 8gFat: 23gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 101mgSodium: 31mgPotassium: 173mgFiber: 4gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 476IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 72mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Pasta Recipe With Scallops

    07/09/2012 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    seared scallops with pasta

    Pasta recipe with scallops: golden seared sea scallops tossed with pasta, sweet halved tomatoes, corn, and zucchini, finished simply with good olive oil, lemon, and torn basil. This seared scallops pasta is ready in about 30 minutes and elegant enough for guests, easy enough for a weeknight.

    A colorful bowl of pasta with seared scallops and vegetables with basil leaves.

    For this pasta recipe with scallops I keep things light. Sauté shallot and garlic, add tomatoes, corn and zucchini, toss with your cooked pasta, then top with scallops seared separately so they stay juicy. No heavy sauce-just a drizzle of olive oil, a squeeze of lemon, and fresh basil to brighten the whole dish.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Pasta Recipe With Scallops

    • Pasta with scallops - restaurant-worthy flavor without the fuss; ready in about 30 minutes. Use sea scallops or bay scallops for a budget-friendly option.
    • Light, fresh finish - no heavy sauce here: a drizzle of olive oil, a squeeze of lemon, and torn basil let the scallops and veggies shine.
    • Flexible & seasonal - swap the zucchini for asparagus or peas, use gluten-free pasta, or make it all zoodles for a lighter version.
    • Weeknight friendly, party-ready - simple to scale and easy to prep ahead; sear the scallops last so they stay juicy and perfectly caramelized.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Pasta - Your choice: gluten-free or wheat. Angel hair, linguine, or spaghetti all work well.
    • Scallops - Large fresh sea scallops (buy "dry" scallops that haven't been treated with additives) for the best sear and flavor.
    • Corn - Fresh corn cut from the cob, or frozen thawed kernels for convenience.
    • Tomatoes - Grape or cherry tomatoes (small, sweet varieties work best); halve before using.
    • Zucchini - Small green zucchini for best color and texture; spiralize or slice as directed.
    • Shallot - Thinly sliced shallot adds a sweet, delicate onion flavor-slice into rings or mince, depending on your preference.
    • Garlic - Fresh garlic cloves, chopped or minced for best aroma and flavor.
    • Olive oil - A good extra-virgin olive oil for sautéing and finishing.
    • Deglazing liquid - Dry white wine is my go-to; a light broth or even a splash of lemon water works if you prefer no alcohol.
    • Herbs - Fresh basil torn, and parsley if you like extra brightness at the end.
    • Lemon (optional)- To squeeze over the dish for fresh flavor and brightness.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Chef's Tip - Sea Scallops vs. Bay Scallops
    I usually buy medium-large dry sea scallops for the best sear, but if you want a budget-friendly option, sweet bay scallops are excellent. Bay scallops are smaller and cook very quickly-don't try to sear them hard (crusty). Instead, sauté briefly in a little olive oil with garlic, salt, and pepper, finishing with a squeeze of lemon or a splash of white wine for brightness. They truly are a delicious option.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vegetable swaps - Peas, baby spinach leaves, thin asparagus pieces, snap peas, extra zucchini.
    • Tomatoes - Swap chopped sun-dried tomatoes for the fresh, adding concentrated flavor. Using roasted cherry tomatoes is good too.
    • Protein swaps: Large shrimp (seared, baked, broiled or grilled) or thinly sliced, cooked chicken breast are good options.

    Buying and Searing Scallops - Quick Guide

    • Smell & appearance: Scallops should smell like the ocean - fresh and briny, not fishy. Avoid any with an off odor.
    • Color - Pink scallops (if you see them) are typically female scallops carrying roe, which gives them a coral color and a richer, sweeter flavor, while white scallops are usually male scallops.
    • Size consistency: Choose scallops that are similar in size so they cook at the same rate.
    • Dry vs. treated: Buy dry (chemical-free) scallops when possible. Ask your fishmonger if they've been treated with phosphates - treated scallops absorb water, look unnaturally white, and won't sear well. You don't want to pay for water weight.
    • Freshness & timing: Use scallops the same day you buy them or no later than the next day.
    • Transport & storage: Ask the fish counter to include an ice pack for the trip home in hot weather. Store scallops in the coldest part of your refrigerator or keep them on a bowl of ice (still packaged) until you're ready to cook.
    • Cooking note: Pat scallops completely dry before cooking for the best crust.

    How to Make Pasta with Scallops

    Bring a pot of water to a boil for pasta and prep your vegetables. Halve the tomatoes, chop the zucchini and cook the corn. If you don't want to use corn, check the veggie swaps above.

    Prep Vegetables

    Chop the zucchini, halve the tomaotes, and cook the corn, if using fresh corn. If using frozen corn, thaw and drain well. Sauté shallot and garlic in a little olive oil, add the vegetables and cook until they are lightly cooked and hot. Keep vegetables warm until your scallops are done.

    Prep Scallops

    Unwrap the scallops and allow them to sit on the counter for 30-45 minutes to get the chill off. Check to see if the abductor muscle is still attached (the "foot"). If it is, remove it. It's chewy and not nice to eat.

    Sear Scallops

    Sprinkle the scallops with kosher or sea salt. Heat the pan over medium to medium high and add two teaspoons olive oil. Place the scallops in a single layer in the pan. Don't crowd them. Allow a golden crust to form.

    Searing scallops in a non-stick until they reach a golden crust.

    This will take a few minutes. Don't disturb the scallops while they are searing. Watch your heat and turn down if needed. You don't want them to burn.

    Finishing searing scallops with a white wine deglaze and placing a lid on top.

    When you get a golden crust, turn them over. Pour in the wine (or broth) and immediately cover with the lid. Turn the heat to low. The scallops will finish cooking in 1-2 minutes, depending on size and thickness. When done they should still be a little translucent in the center. Don't overcook them.

    Chef's Tip - Best Pan for Searing Scallops
    To get a good sear on scallops you need a reliable pan, but they are also delicate. If your nonstick is scratched, worn, or flaking, retire it and replace it - it's not safe to use. A well-seasoned cast-iron skillet is an excellent alternative for a nice crust.

    How to Serve a Pasta Recipe with Scallops

    To serve, place pasta and vegetables in a wide shallow bowl and top with scallops. For garish, sprinkle on additional fresh chopped herbs, top with scallops and if desired and little drizzle of good finishing olive oil (a lemon olive oil is nice), and a squeeze of fresh lemon if desired.

    Storage and Reheating

    While this pasta recipe is best served fresh, scallops can be reheated - but be very careful, because they easily become tough and rubbery. Warm them gently over low heat: a quick sauté in a little butter or olive oil for about 30-45 seconds, or a brief covered steam for 60 seconds, just until warmed through. Avoid high heat, long reheating times, or microwaving, which will overcook them and turn them rubbery.

    If you do have leftovers, store the scallops and pasta/vegetables separately in airtight containers. Refrigerate and use scallops within 24 hours - best eaten the next day.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long should I sear scallops?

    Sear one side until a golden crust forms ( 1 ½-2 minutes). Turn the scallops, add a splash of white wine or lemon water, cover with a lid, and finish for about 1 minute - this keeps the crust intact and yields moist, tender scallops.

    Are scallops safe to eat rare?

    Scallops should be opaque in the center and slightly firm. They are not served raw like sashimi in this preparation - cook until just done for best texture. If you over-cook scallops can become rubbery.

    Can I use frozen scallops?

    Yes - thaw them completely overnight in the refrigerator, then pat them totally dry before cooking. Excess moisture prevents a good sear.

    Do I need to remove the side muscle?

    Yes. Peel off the small rectangular side muscle (if present) before cooking - it can be chewy. It is what anchors the scallop inside it's shell.

    Can I swap the scallops for another protein?

    Yes - large shrimp cooked the same way works well. For non-seafood options, thin sliced chicken breast or Italian-style chicken sausage are good swaps.

    More Seafood Recipes

    Love seafood? Here are more dishes to try, all easy and doable for a weeknight or even for weekend company. Check out the fish and seafood recipes index for more inspration.

    • Grilled shrimp on bamboo sticks on a white platter with chimchurri sauce.
      Shrimp Skewers (Grilled or Oven)
    • Crusty topped blackened fish filet on top of coleslaw in a gray bowl.
      Blackened Mahi Mahi (Air Fryer Recipe)
    • baked lemon shrimp scampi
      Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi
    • Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.
      How to Make Steamed Salmon

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this pasta recipe with scallops, please let me know how you enjoyed it. I love hearing from you, and your comments help others too. Please consider leaving a start rating.

    📖 Recipe

    seared scallops with pasta | afoodcentriclife.com

    Pasta Recipe With Scallops

    Sally Cameron
    Packed with colorful summer vegetables serve seared scallops over pasta. After a little vegetable prep work, it goes together easily. Toss in thinly sliced basil leaves at the end for wonderful flavor and even more color. You'll need a good nonstick pan to sear the scallops. To save a few minutes, you can use organic frozen sweet corn instead of cooking an ear of fresh corn. Alternatively, serve with steamed brown rice.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 444 kcal

    Equipment

    • Non-stick pan

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup cooked corn kernels 2 ears or use frozen thawed
    • 2-3 small zucchini about a pound
    • 1 dry pint grape or cherry tomatoes
    • 1 large shallot
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil divided use
    • 3 large garlic cloves chopped fine
    • 1 pound large sea scallops
    • ⅓ cup dry white wine or broth
    • Salt and pepper to taste
    • 2 handfuls fresh basil leaves torn up
    • 8 ounces pasta of choice angel hair, linguine, or spaghetti
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped parsley
    • 1 lemon cut into wedges for squeezing

    Instructions
     

    Start pasta water

    • Fill a large pot of water ¾ fupp, add a little salt, and get it started. While the water is coming to a boil, prep the vegetables. Put wide shallow pasta dishes in a low oven (175°F) or warming drawer. This is optional but nice.

    Prep corn

    • If using fresh corn, bring a pot of water large enough to hold the ears of corn to a boil. Add salt and drop corn into the boiling water. Cook for 3 minutes and remove the corn. When cool enough to handle, cut the kernels off the cob with a sharp knife and set aside.
      If using frozen corn, thaw and drain, no need to cook (as it is already blanched).

    Prep other vegetables

    • For zucchini, trim off the ends, then cut lengthwise into quarters. Cut each quarter into slices about a ½" (1 cm) wide. Set aside. Slice tomatoes in half. Halve the shallot lengthwise, lay flat and slice into thin pieces.

    Cook pasta and vegetables

    • Start the pasta and cook according to package directions.
    • In a large sauté or fry pan over medium heat, add 1 ½ tablespoons of olive oil. When hot add the shallot and cook for 1 minute. Add the garlic and cook for 30 seconds, then add the corn, zucchini, and tomatoes. Cook 5-7 minutes until tomatoes soften and zucchini and corn brown a bit. When done turn off the heat and sprinkle with salt and pepper to season. Keep warm.

    Sear scallops

    • To sear scallops, pat them dry, then season top and bottom with salt and pepper. Heat a non-stick sauté pan over medium heat with half a tablespoon of olive oil. When hot, place the scallops in a flat, single layer in the pan.
      Allow them to cook until a golden brown crust forms, then turn carefully. Pour in the wine, cover with a lid immediately and turn heat to low. Cook scallops about another 1-2 minutes. When done, they will be slightly translucent in the center. Do not over cook them. Depending on size, they will take 5-7 minutes total.

    To serve

    • Portion hot pasta into bowls and top with vegetables, basil and parsley, then scallops. Drizzle with a little extra olive oil ad serve with lemon wedges if desired. Serve immediately.

    Notes

    To serve, place pasta and vegetables in a wide shallow bowl and top with scallops. For garish, sprinkle on additional fresh chopped herbs, top with scallops and if desired and little drizzle of good finishing olive oil (a lemon olive oil is nice).

    Nutrition

    Calories: 444kcalCarbohydrates: 62gProtein: 25gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 27mgSodium: 549mgPotassium: 1010mgFiber: 5gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 1256IUVitamin C: 36mgCalcium: 59mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy One-Pan Cherry Cake with Fresh Cherries

    06/25/2023 by Sally Cameron 11 Comments

    A single layer sweet cherry cake with golden top on white plate.

    Bursting with sweet cherries and old-fashioned charm, this easy one-pan cherry cake is the kind of simple summer dessert you'll make on repeat. It's buttery, tender, and comes together fast-no fuss, no fancy equipment. Just fresh fruit, a quick batter, and a single pan. Serve it with a dusting of powdered sugar, a scoop of ice cream, or a dollop of whipped cream. Make it either gluten-free or with all purpose flour (I've done both). It's always a crowd-pleaser.

    A sweet cherry cake on a white plate with a slice on a small plate.

    For simplicity sake I'm calling this a cherry cake. It's sort of a cross between and old fashioned American dessert called a fruit buckle, and a country French dessert called a clafoutis. When it's fresh cherry time of the year, this is the first recipe I think of. No sugary neon maraschino cherries or pink color frosting, just a simple, rustic one-layer cake with fresh sweet cherries.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • One-pan wonder - A simple summer dessert that bakes in a single pan.
    • Sweet cherry flavor - Fresh cherries make all the difference.
    • Made from scratch - No boxed mixes here, just real ingredients and easy steps.

    For another fantastic cake, try this lemon olive oil cake, one of my favorite dessert recipes.

    Recipe Ingredients

    How do you make a cherry cake from scratch? Let me show you how easy it is.

    Ingredients for cherry cake on the counter in bowls.
    • Cherries - The best cherries for cherry cake are fresh, sweet varieties. Look for Bing, black, or yellow-red Rainier cherries-whatever looks best at the market.
    • Flour - I use King Arthur gluten-free flour blend with xanthan gum for structure and binding (a must in gluten-free baking). Not gluten-free? All-purpose flour works too, that's how I made it before going GF.
    • Baking powder - Choose aluminum-free baking powder to help the cake rise evenly.
    • Butter - Unsalted dairy butter is best for baking (I never buy salted).
    • Sugar - Natural cane sugar sweetens the batter without being overly refined.
    • Eggs - Large eggs add color, richness, and structure to the cake.
    • Almond extract - Almond and cherry are a classic flavor pairing, and this extract adds just the right touch, but you could use vanilla extract.
    • For serving - Heavy cream for whipped cream or vanilla ice cream.

    Please see the recipe card for quantities.

    Chef's Note: I've been making this cherry cake for decades-originally with all-purpose or cake flour before I started baking gluten-free 14 years ago. It works beautifully either way, so feel free to use regular all purpose flour if you don't need a gluten-free version. But if you use GF flour, no one will even know.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • To make this cake dairy-free use unsalted plant-based butter such as Miyokos in a block or Earth Balance. Don't buy the tubs or "buttery spreads" as they are not the same as cubes or blocks. If you are nut-allergic, using plant-based butter could be a challenge as many use cashews. Read labels carefully. For good substitutes, here's a good article on vegan butters in baking.
    • To reduce sugar, use part or all monk fruit blend.
    • Swap the almond extract for vanilla extract or vanilla paste.

    For another easy almond flavored cake, try this almond flour orange cake.

    Chef's Tip on tools: use disposable kitchen gloves protect hands from the high stain juice of cherries (and a sturdy kitchen apron). The best way to pit cherries for a cherry cake is with a handy, inexpensive kitchen gadget called a cherry pitter. For the best results with this cherry cake (and all baking), weigh your flour with a digital kitchen scale. This is especially important with gluten-free flours.

    Recipe Instructions

    You need a 9" springform pan for your baking pan, and parchment paper, either pieces you can cut or 9" parchment rounds. Buy them online or at a kitchen supply store. Have your butter and eggs at room temperature before starting.

    Pitting dark red cherries on a sheet pan to contain the juices.
    Step 1: Pit cherries
    Adding dry ingredients to a bowl and whisk together.
    Step 2: Add the dry ingredients and whisk together.
    Adding soft butter and sugar to a bowl for cake batter.
    Step 3: In a separate bowl, add sugar and soft butter.
    Creaming the butter and sugar together for batter.
    Step 4: With an electric mixer, "cream" the butter and sugar until smooth and fluffy.
    Butter yellow batter in a stainless bowl with beaters.
    Step 5: Add the eggs, extract, and whip into a smooth creamy base with a hand mixer.
    Adding dry ingredients to the batter base for cake batter.
    Step 6: Add the dry ingredients (flour mixture) to the bowl, starting on low speed beat until the batter forms.
    Finished buttery yellow cake batter ready for the baking pan.
    Step 7: Increase to high speed and beat batter until smooth. 2-3 minutes.
    Thick cake batter in a cake pan to be spread out with a spatula.
    Step 8: Pour batter batter into the prepared pan. It will be thick.
    Cake batter spread into a springform pan for baking.
    Step 9: Spread the batter evenly in the pan for baking with a flexible spatula.
    Cake batter topped with halved red cherries.
    Step 10: Arrange halved cherries on top of the cake batter. Bake until the top is golden and firm to the touch.
    Baked golden cherry cake on a cooling rack.
    Step 11: After baking, allow the cherry cake to cool for 10 minutes, then release the spring and cool on a wire rack.

    Chef's note: Fresh or frozen cherries? I have not tested this recipe with frozen pitted cherries. My concern is all of the extra moisture frozen cherries have. Even when thawed and patted dry in paper towels, they may not work out well in this recipe. If you try it, be sure the cherries are as dry as possible and let me know how it comes out.

    Baked cherry cake with a slice on a small plate.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve it for dessert but sneak a piece for breakfast. All this cherry cake needs is a simple embellishment such as a scoop of vanilla ice cream, lightly sweetened whipped cream, or a little sweetened plain Greek yogurt (with honey), or just eat it plain. It's that good. A simple dusting of powdered sugar or powdered monk fruit is good too.

    Cherry cake keeps wrapped with plastic wrap on the counter for 2 days or 3-4 days well wrapped in the refrigerator, although it will soften. Honestly, it disappears too quick!

    If you love cherries like I do, try this healthy cherry smoothie with Greek yogurt.

    A piece of cherry cake with fork on a plate, topped with ice cream.

    Recipe FAQs

    What kind of cherry is used in cakes?

    Some recipes use maraschino cherries but a cherry cake is far better if you use real sweet cherries. It depends on the style of the recipe. Maraschino cherries are preserved, bleached, dyed to neon red, and sweetened with sugar. To me they are not really cherries. I vote for real fresh cherries, a healthier, tastier choice.

    What cherry is best for baking?

    It depends on what you are baking, as cherries come from sweet to sour. Sweet Bing cherries and black cherries, Ranier cherries, and Lambert cherries work well. Use what is best at your market. Bing cherries and Raniers are my usual choice for baking. The varieties will vary by where you live. Sour cherries can be good for baking pies, cherry compotes, and crumbles. They are more fragile, softer and often smaller than sweet cherries, so use them up faster then you would a sweet cherry (or pit and freeze them).

    Can I substitute maraschino cherries for fresh cherries in a cherry cake recipe?

    Not if fresh cherries are specified. Fresh cherries and maraschino cherries are very different and the results will not be the same. For a maraschino cherry cake recipe you need one created with that style of cherry instead of fresh cherries.

    Close up of top of cherry cake studded with dark cherries and powdered sugar.

    More Delicious Dessert Recipes

    Check out the dessert category page for more ideas. If you enjoy baking, try this orange almond cake. It's another one pan easy recipe. If you love frozen desserts, try this nectarine sorbet, refreshing and dairy-free too.

    • Gluten-free brownies with melted chocolate in a square pan after baking.
      Fudgy Gluten-Free Chocolate Brownies
    • A golden slice of lemon olive oil cake, made wit whole almonds, served with berries and glaze.
      Super Moist Lemon Olive Oil Cake Recipe
    • champagne sabayon sauce
      How to Make Sabayon
    • easy lemon mousse
      Lemon Mousse (Light and Airy)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this delicious cherry cake, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A single layer sweet cherry cake with golden top on white plate.

    Easy One-Pan Cherry Cake Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    An easy cherry cake that is a simple country-style dessert. Get your butter and eggs out of the fridge ahead of time. For best results, weigh flour on a kitchen scale for accuracy.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 55 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 256 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9" springform pan
    • Parchment paper
    • Kitchen gloves optional
    • Cherry pitter tool optional but helpful
    • Electric hand mixer
    • digital kitchen scale

    Ingredients
      

    Cherry Cake

    • Non-stick spray or use the butter wrapper
    • 35-40 large fresh sweet cherries 12 ounces before pitting
    • 1 cup gluten-free flour blend 4.6 ounces
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder aluminum-free
    • 1 pinch sea salt
    • 4 ounces unsalted dairy butter at room temperature, sub plant butter
    • ¾ cup  organic cane sugar or monk fruit blend 5 ½ ounces
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 teaspoon almond extract or sub vanilla extract
    • 2-3 teaspoons sugar optional for top before baking

    Instructions
     

    Pre-heat Oven, Prepare Pan

    • Position oven rack in the center and pre-heat oven to 350 degrees. Prepare your pan. Spray or butter the bottom of the springform pan and line the bottom with a parchment circle.

    Pit the Cherries

    • Wash, stem and pit the cherries with a cherry pitter tool or a paring knife. Cut the cherries in half, top to bottom.

    Blend the Batter

    • In a small bowl, whisk together the flour, baking powder and salt. In a medium bowl, cream the butter and sugar together until light and fluffy with a hand-held electric mixer. Add the eggs and beat until incorporated and the batter is smooth. Add in the almond extract. Add in the flour blend. Beat on low speed, increasing speed as batter stiffens, until smooth. Batter will be thick.

    Bake the Cake

    • Scrape batter into the pan and smooth to the edges with a flexible spatula. Starting at the outer edge, place the cherries cut side down on top of the batter completely covering the top. Sprinkle the top with the 3 teaspoons extra sugar if desired and. Bake cake until golden on top, 45-55 minutes or until a cake tester, toothpick or paring knife inserted in the center comes out clean, and top is lightly golden.

    Cool Cake and Serve

    • Remove cake from the oven and allow to cool 10 minutes. Run a thin paring knife around the inside of the pan edge to free the cake. Pop the spring and remove the sides of the pan. Serve warm or at room temperature, topped with ice cream, whipped cream, or powdered sugar. Cake keeps 2 days well wrapped on the counter or up to 4 days in the refrigerator.

    Notes

    Kitchen gloves will prevent your hands from getting stained from the cherries and are a handy for every kitchen.
    The cake can be made a day ahead, cooled, wrapped well in plastic film and held on the counter for 2 days or refrigerated for a few days longer. Bring back to room temperature before serving.
    Baker’s Tip: If using a monk fruit and allulose blend, check the cake 5–10 minutes early, as it may brown more quickly than with regular sugar. You can also reduce the oven temperature to 325°F if your cake browns too fast.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 256kcalCarbohydrates: 36gProtein: 4gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 77mgSodium: 64mgPotassium: 94mgFiber: 2gSugar: 24gVitamin A: 441IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 61mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe

    02/06/2024 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.

    Creamy roasted red bell pepper hummus recipe will make hummus lovers happy. Using pantry staples like roasted red peppers and garbanzo beans, this middle eastern dip makes a great afternoon healthy snack or pre-dinner nibble. Serve it up for game day too with crackers, pita chips, crostini, or raw veggies. Just make some, and make it ahead.

    A bowl of creamy bright orange red pepper hummus with cucumbers and chips.

    Here's a nice twist from regular hummus. Roasted red pepper hummus goes together in a matter of minutes with jarred, roasted red bell peppers, garbanzo beans, tahini, olive oil, and spices for bold flavors. Puree in a food processor and until smooth or use a high-speed blender. Homemade hummus is the best!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Made with pantry items.
    • Easy, goes together quickly.
    • Versatile serving ideas.

    If you love garbanzo beans, try this terrific kale salad with garbanzo beans and a creamy tahini dressing.

    Recipe Ingredients

    This recipe serves about 6 people. If you need a lot of hummus the recipe doubles easily.

    Ingredients for roasted red bell pepper hummus on a counter.
    • Roasted red peppers: The key ingredient. Use jarred, already roasted peppers for speed and the ease of keeping in the pantry, or roast your own peppers. Directions below.
    • Garbanzo beans: Use canned garbanzo beans (aka canned chickpeas) for ease in getting this hummus recipe made. You'll use some of the canned liquid (called aquafaba) for a creamier hummus. It looks like egg whites.
    • Tahini: Sesame seed paste used in traditional hummus for a creamy consistency. and richness. Think of peanut butter made from sesame seeds but it's not sweet, more bitter and earthy.
    • Lemon: Fresh lemon juice brightens the flavor and provides a little liquid to help when pureeing.
    • Extra virgin olive oil: Healthy fat that adds flavor and smoothness to hummus.
    • Ground cumin: One of the most widely used spices in the world. It has a rich, warm, earthy, almost lemony flavor. Buy ground, not seeds, unless you grind you own fresh.
    • Paprika: Use either regular paprika, sharp or hot paprika for the kick (it can be quite hot so go easy,) or my favorite, smoked paprika for a smoky flavor. Can't live without it!
    • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves work well, but you can use a tube of garlic puree.

    Please see recipe card for quantities.

    Chef's tip: Two ways to use fresh garlic. One, peel the cloves then drop the whole cloves through the food processor feed tube while the machine is running before other ingredients. For super fine garlic that is a paste, use a microplane zester. Works great.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Substitute sunflower butter (sun butter) for a hummus recipe without tahini.

    To make red pepper hummus spicier, try adding chipotle powder, cayenne pepper, Tabasco sauce, your favorite hot sauce, or another style hot condiment such as harissa when you are pureeing it. If you roast your own red bell peppers, roast 1-2 hot red chili peppers with the bell peppers, seed them, chop fine and puree.

    Want another terrific garbanzo recipe? Try this easy three bean salad with chickpeas, kidney beans, and green beans.

    Recipe Instructions

    There are a few ways to achieve creamy hummus. First, don't throw the canned liquid that they come in away. It's called aquafaba. Adding a little of this liquid to your hummus helps give it that creamy consistency.

    A glass bowl of drained garbanzo beans and their liquid.
    Step 1: Drain the beans through a strainer into a bowl but save the can liquid
    Inside view of a food processor with red peppers, spices, and garlic.
    Step 2: Step 1: Add peppers, spices, garlic, oil, and lemon to the bowl of a food processor.
    Adding chickpeas to a food processor for making hummus.
    Step 3: Step 2: After pureeing peppers add tahini, beans and bean liquid (aquafaba).
    Creamy, bright orange red pepper hummus in a food processor workbowl.
    Step 4: Puree until smooth, taste and adjust taste with more salt if needed.

    How Do I Roast My Own Red Peppers for Hummus?

    If you want to roast your own red bell peppers, there are two main ways:

    • Method one: roast red peppers directly over a medium open flame such as the top of a gas stove (placing them directly on the grate) or barbecue until the skins are blackened and charred. Turn them occasionally to get even black blistering. There will still be a few areas of red when they are done, so don't worry.
    • Method two: heat the broiler to hot, place an oven rack on the second level down from the top. Line a rimmed baking sheet with foil (parchment paper could light on fire). Cut the peppers in half top to bottom and remove the seeds. Lay the pepper halves flat and broil until the skins are blackened and fairly evenly charred. Remove from the oven.

    For both methods, when peppers are well charred, place them in a medium bowl and cover tightly with plastic. This steams the skins off allowing for easier removal.

    When the peppers are cool enough to handle, peel and rub off as much of the blackened skins as possible and remove seeds. It's a bit messy, so wear disposable kitchen gloves if you prefer. The peppers are ready to use.

    If you love roasted red bell peppers, try this sheet pan red pepper soup!

    Serving Suggestions

    A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.

    Here's What to Serve With Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus

    • Cucumber slices.
    • Raw zucchini "chips" or sticks.
    • Endive leaves (they are great scoopers).
    • Rice crackers or wheat crackers.
    • Pita chips or warm pita bread wedges.

    Roasted red pepper hummus is a terrific appetizer spread to make ahead of time. It lasts for up to 5 days well refrigerated in an airtight container so make a few days ahead of time.

    What Else Can You do With Red Pepper Hummus?

    • Make a Mediterranean turkey wrap spreading red pepper hummus onto tortillas, add turkey and salad greens.
    • Use for a delicious sandwich spread on whole grain or gluten-free bread.
    • Toss with hot pasta noodles.
    • Packs easily for lunch at school or the office in a to-go, airtight container.
    • Use a dollop to top roast fish or chicken.
    • Use as a sauce for chicken, fish, or vegetarian tacos.
    • Use it as part of a beautiful Mediterranean mezze platter when friends are coming over.
    Creamy red pepper hummus on a cracker.

    More Hummus and Dips

    Ready to party? There are lots of terrific dips and spreads for snacking, sharing, and enjoying. The nice thing is they are all easy to make. Check out the appetizers and snacks page for more ideas!

    • Close up of creamy basil and avocado dip in white bowl.
      Avocado Dip with Yogurt and Fresh Basil
    • Easy Green Goddess Dip (and dressing)
    • Creamy salmon dip on an appetizer tray with crackers and cucumber chips.
      The Best Smoked Salmon Dip Recipe
    • Golden Mediterranean hummus in a bowl sprinkled with olive oil, za'atar, and garbanzo beans.
      Homemade Hummus Without Tahini

    ⭐️Did you Make This?

    If you make this recipe, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.

    Roasted Red Pepper Hummus

    Sally Cameron
    Bright orange with a smoky, creamy taste, this roasted red bell pepper hummus goes together in minutes with a food processor. Serve with cool cucumber slices and raw veggies, brown rice crackers or whole wheat pita wedges. It lasts 5 days in the refrigerator. Doubles easily for a crowd.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine Middle Eastern
    Servings 6 servings (yield 2 cups)
    Calories 50 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 15-ounce can garbanzo beans
    • 2 tablespoons aquafaba (the can liquid from the beans) save when you drain the can
    • 1 6-ounce jar roasted red peppers drained and chopped
    • 1 lemon juiced
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1-2 garlic cloves peeled and zested or finely chopped
    • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika or regular paprika
    • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Instructions
     

    • Pour canned garbanzo beans through a strainer over a bowl to save the canned liquid (aquafaba). Drain and roughly chop the peppers. For garlic cloves, either chop finely by hand or zest with a microplane before adding to the food processor, or drop them first into the food processor with the blade running through the feed tube to chop.
      Add beans, peppers and all of the rest of the ingredients to a food processor. Puree until smooth and creamy. Taste and adjust seasoning to your preference.

    Notes

    To roast your own red bell peppers, its takes about 2 large or 3 small peppers:
    Method 1: Roast whole directly over the flame of a gas stove (place them right on the grate), turning until mostly black, blistered and charred. Place in a medium bowl and cover tightly with plastic wrap. When cool enough to handle, peel of as much skin as possible the use in recipe. 
    Method 2: Cut peppers in half top to bottom and remove the seeds. Place cut side down on a foil lined baked sheet and broil until charred and blackened. Remove skin as noted above.
    Ways to enjoy this hummus:
    • Spread onto a brown rice or whole wheat tortilla, add turkey and greens and make a Mediterranean turkey wrap
    • Use for a sandwich on whole grain or gluten-free bread
    • Toss with hot pasta noodles
    • Packs easily for lunch at school or the office
    • Use a dollop to top roast fish or chicken
    • Use as a sauce for chicken, fish or vegetarian tacos
    Serve with cucumber slices, carrot sticks, raw zucchini sticks, cracker, pita wedges, or pita chips.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 50kcalCarbohydrates: 2gProtein: 0.4gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gSodium: 101mgPotassium: 42mgFiber: 1gSugar: 0.5gVitamin A: 174IUVitamin C: 10mgCalcium: 10mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Hawaiian Salad With Goat Cheese

    04/16/2011 by Sally Cameron 13 Comments

    Color Hawaiian salad with tomatoes, avocado, pineapple, beets. macadamia nuts and more in a bowl with utensils.

    Say aloha to boring salads with this colorful Hawaiian salad. Inspired by dinner at one of Hawaii's most famous dining spots, I couldn't wait to recreate it at home and share it with you. Featuring fresh greens, creamy goat cheese, tropical pineapple, beets, crisp cucumbers, and sweet tomatoes, it's dressed with a champagne vinaigrette. If you're ready to change up the usual Hawaiian fruit salad to something better, try this terrific Hawaiian-inspired salad recipe.

    A large round salad bowl filled with greens, tomatoes, beets, pineapple, goat cheese, cucumber, macadamia nuts and avocado.

    If you search for a Hawaiian salad recipe you'll find many different options from a Hawaiian mac salad (a pasta salad) or a Hawaiian chicken salad, to the famous sugar-laden Hawaiian ambrosia salad (a creamy fruit salad) often made with fake food cool whip, sour cream, mini marshmallows, mandarin oranges, and maraschino cherries (and about 50 grams of sugar per serving). To be fair, some recipes use Greek yogurt.

    It's just too unhealthy with all of that sugar. For a delicious, healthier Hawaiian salad, try this recipe.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Salad

    • It's sweet, savory, tangy, and crisp all in a bowl.
    • Enjoy the goat cheese or omit for vegan/dairy-free.
    • It's a way healthier, tastier option than your typical Hawaiian salad.

    For another Hawaiian-inspired recipe try my Hawaiian Green Smoothie.

    Hawaiian Salad Ingredients

    Ingredients for a Hawaiian salad with salad greens, tomatoes, goat cheese, pineapple, cucumbers, beets, and vinaigrette.

    For the salad

    • Lettuce: Heads of fresh red lettuce, or buy pre-washed mixed spring greens.
    • Tomatoes: Small cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes, red or mixed colors.
    • Pineapple: Either buy a small fresh pineapple to cut up yourself or buy already cut pineapple chunks or spears available in the refrigerated produce section. Use it fresh or grill it.
    • Cucumber: Use the small, crisp Persian cucumbers, mini cucumbers, or an English cucumber.
    • Beets: I use the deep red-purple beets for more color contrast but golden beets work too. Roast your own beets (directions below) or get a package of the steamed ready-to-eat beets.
    • Avocado: I've added avocado to the salad just because I love avocado! You can use it or leave it out. Buy one that is ripe and ready to cut, or if rock hard wait a few days for it to ripen.
    • Goat cheese: Get a small package or log of "chevre" which is fresh goat cheese and crumble it yourself. It's soft and tangy, a little tart and totally delicious. Pre-crumbled goat cheese works too.
    • Green onions: A sprinkle of finely chopped green onions or chives adds color, flavor, and a nice finishing touch.
    • Avocado: A nice buttery creamy addition (optional).

    Champagne vinaigrette

    A light champagne vinaigrette lets the salad flavors shine and compliments without overpowering.

    • Oil: Here's the place for a good extra virgin olive oil.
    • Vinegar: Champagne vinegar makes a lovely light vinaigrette, alternatives below.
    • Egg yolk: Raw egg yolk makes the vinaigrette a little creamy as it emulsifies the dressing (optional, it's a good trick).
    • Garlic: Use a fresh clove for it's pungent sharp flavor. A fresh garlic clove, or use the puree in the tube.
    • Shallot: Adds a little sharp-sweet flavor and texture to the vinaigrette. Optional but such a nice addition.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and seasonings.

    For another terrific summer salad with fruit, try this refreshing watermelon basil salad with feta cheese.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Using these substitutions change the salad a bit but all of them taste great and work well.

    • Swap Greek feta for the goat cheese.
    • Use an unseasoned rice vinegar in place of the champagne vinegar, or use red wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar.
    • If using raw egg yolk concerns you (it is usually safe as long as your eggs are fresh and un-cracked), just omit it and add a little creamy Dijon mustard to help emulsify the vinaigrette and add flavor. You can add it even if you are using the yolk.
    • To add a nice buttery crunch, add unsalted Hawaiian macadamia nuts (here is what I buy). 
    • Skip the green onion and add slivers of red onion for more color. 

    For another vinaigrette that works with the Hawaiian salad, try the lemon vinaigrette recipe with this lentil and quinoa salad.

    Chef's tip: How to roast beets. Trim beet greens to 1" and scrub clean. Pre-heat oven to 400°F. Place beets in a double layer of heavy foil, sprinkle with oil, salt and pepper. Fold up foil to create a package and roast until beets are tender when pierced through, about 45 minutes. For full directions and how to skin beets, please see this post on how to roast beets.

    Love a good Greek salad? Try this one with leafy greens, Greek feta, olives, tomatoes, cucumbers and a terrific Greek vinaigrette.

    How to Make the Salad

    Hawaiian salad ingredients prepped and ready to toss together for serving.
    1. Start by making the vinaigrette. Whisk the vinaigrette ingredients in a small bowl until smooth. For making a larger quantity of dressing, add ingredients to a blender and blend briefly on low speed until smooth and emulsified.
    2. For the salad, wash and dry your salad greens. A salad spinner makes it easy!
    3. Halve the tomatoes, cube the pineapple, slice or chop the cucumbers, crumble the goat cheese. Wait to slice the avocado until before serving so it does not oxidize (turn brown).

    To prepare Hawaiian salad in advance, wash and dry your lettuce leaves and ready each of the components. Keep them refrigerated individually in an airtight container separately.

    Save dicing the avocado for just before serving so it does not oxidize (turn brown). Ready a large bowl and salad serving utensils. When you're ready to serve it goes together like a breeze!

    Pineapple Tips

    Chunks of golden yellow pineapple in an air fryer with browned edges.

    Pineapple for the Hawaiian salad can be enjoyed raw or cooked, grilled on a gas grill, a grill pan indoors, briefly broiled, or in an air fryer at 400° for about 5 minutes shaking the basket half the way through.

    Chop and toss or brush with a few drops of olive oil or neutral oil to prevent sticking. Alternatively you can cook them as spears and chop them after cooking or grilling.

    Colorful Hawaiian salad with fresh greens, pineapple, tomatoes, beets, and goat cheese in a white bowl.

    For a fruit salad recipe that's colorful and healthy without added sugar, try this fresh fruit salad recipe. It's easily varied by swapping a few of the fruit options for tropical options or seasonally what's best at the store.

    Salad Serving Suggestions

    Make the vinaigrette, toss the greens in a large bowl with a little vinaigrette to start and add the goodies. Serve extra dressing on the side. This is a wonderful salad for family gatherings because of all of the vibrant colors. It looks beautiful arranged on a big platter or large bowl.

    Serve it as a side salad or add grilled chicken, rotisserie chicken, or shrimp for more of a main course salad.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I add tropical fruits other than pineapple?

    For a Hawaiian salad variation, try adding different fresh tropical fruit such as kiwi fruit, a little mango, passion fruit, guava, or papaya adding tropical color and sweetness. Avocado is another you might not think (yes it is actually a fruit) but they too are grown in Hawaii's fertile volcanic soil.

    What protein works best in a Hawaiian salad?

    Adding protein makes a Hawaiian salad a complete meal. Grilled chicken and shrimp work well. For plant-based diets, try a little tempeh or firm grilled tofu. For another seafood option often served in Hawaii, try mahi mahi filets.

    What nuts are best to use in a Hawaiian salad?

    Grown in Hawaii since the 1800's, macadamia nuts are the classic nut to add to a Hawaiian salad. Another nut grown in Hawaii is the cashew, both delicious options for aHawaiian salad.

    More Fresh Salad Recipes

    Here are more ideas for salads to jazz up your salad routine. And if you're looking for salads with beans, grains, or veggies, check out the Salads Recipe page.

    • greek salad
      Tossed Greek Green Salad
    • spinach salad with pomegranate
      Pomegranate and Spinach Salad
    • leafy green and berry salad
      Strawberry Goat Cheese Salad

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this Hawaiian salad, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Color Hawaiian salad with tomatoes, avocado, pineapple, beets. macadamia nuts and more in a bowl with utensils.

    Hawaiian Salad Recipe with Goat Cheese

    Sally Cameron
    This brightly colored Hawaiian style salad is fresh tasting and healthy, inspired by Merriman's Restaurant on the Big Island of Hawaii. To make it a main course, add more salad greens and add grilled chicken or shrimp. For dairy-free, skip the cheese. Buy pre-cooked beets or roast your own (takes about 40 minutes, do ahead). Macadamia nuts are a nice add too.
    4.41 from 5 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Salad
    Cuisine Hawaiian
    Servings 4
    Calories 485 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    To Roast the Beets (or buy pre-cooked to save time)

    • 2 medium red beets or other color
    • 2 teaspoons olive oil
    • ⅛ teaspoon salt
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Hawaiian Salad

    • 1 large head crisp red lettuce or 5-6 ounce container pre-washed lettuce
    • 12-16 sweet grape tomatoes halved lengthwise
    • 4 small spears fresh pineapple diced
    • 1 small English cucumber or 3-4 mini cucumbers chopped
    • 1 ripe avocado split, seeded, quartered then diced
    • 4-6 ounces goat cheese crumbled

    Champagne Vinaigrette

    • 6 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons champagne vinegar or white wine vinegar
    • 1 large egg yolk optional
    • 1 small garlic clove finely chopped or zested
    • 2 teaspoons finely chopped shallot optional
    • 2 pinches sea salt
    • 2 pinches ground black pepper

    Instructions
     

    To roast your own beets (do ahead of time and chill)

    • Pre-heat the oven to 425 degrees. Trim the tops off the beets to about 1 inch. Wash and dry the beets and place on a double piece of heavy foil. Toss the beets with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
      Wrap the beets up in the foil and place the packet on the center rack in the oven. Roast until beets are easily pierced with the tip of a thin skewer like a cake tester or a paring knife, about 40 minutes depending on the size.
      Remove beet packet from the oven and cool until you can handle them. With paper towels, rub the skins off of the beets; quarter them and set aside. Chill the beets then cut into pieces.
      Note - Wear disposable food handler gloves while working with the beets to prevent staining your hands.

    Make the vinaigrette (makes extra)

    • While the beets are roasting, make the vinaigrette. Whisk oil, vinegar, yolk, garlic and shallot together in a small bowl until creamy, or shake well in a jar with a tight lid. Season with salt and pepper.
      If vinaigrette is made ahead of time, refrigerate until serving due to the raw egg yolk. Re-whisk if needed.

    Assemble the Salad

    • Serve the salad family style in one large bowl or on individual plates.
      For family style, toss the greens with a little of the vinaigrette, add to a large bowl and add the cucumber, tomatoes, beets, avocado, pineapple, and goat cheese. Serve extra vinaigrette on the side.

    Notes

    Vinaigrette note:
    If using a raw egg yolk concerns you, omit it from the vinaigrette, but it does make it nice and creamy. If the egg is fresh and un-cracked, you should have no worries. Dressing with raw yolk is good for 2 days (only) refrigerated.
    Another option is use Dijon mustard to emulsify the dressing. Add about 1 teaspoon and whisk well until creamy. 
    The nutrition calculation includes all of the vinaigrette so it is not accurate.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 485kcalCarbohydrates: 31gProtein: 10gFat: 38gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 24gCholesterol: 59mgSodium: 450mgPotassium: 855mgFiber: 8gSugar: 19gVitamin A: 1296IUVitamin C: 72mgCalcium: 97mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Blender Lemon Chicken Marinade

    08/11/2023 by Sally Cameron 10 Comments

    Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.

    Your go-to summer chicken marinade is about to get even better. This easy lemon chicken marinade blends fresh lemon, garlic, Dijon, olive oil, and herbs into a bright, flavorful sauce that does double duty as both a marinade and a finishing drizzle for grilled chicken. Make it in minutes in the blender, marinate your chicken, then brush on a little clean marinade after grilling for extra flavor. It's simple, fresh, and perfect for an easy summer dinner.

    White platter of grilled chicken breasts with lemon and herbs.

    Marinades are meant to add flavor to meat and poultry, but too often they fall short. Not this lemon chicken marinade. Fresh lemon, herbs, and garlic bring bright, bold flavor, while Dijon mustard helps create a creamy, emulsified marinade that clings beautifully to the chicken. For the best flavor, brush the grilled chicken with a little clean marinade right after it comes off the grill, and serve extra on the side as a sauce. It's simple, but it makes the flavor pop.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Lemon Chicken Marinade Recipe Highlights

    • Use it three ways - As a lemon chicken marinade, a finishing sauce, or a bright dressing.
    • beyond chicken - Try it with shrimp, fish, or chicken skewers.
    • Grill indoors or out - Cook on an outdoor grill or inside with a grill pan.
    • Great for skewers - Marinate chicken chunks, thread onto skewers, and grill.

    For another chicken marinade recipe, try these baked teriyaki chicken thighs with homemade teriyaki sauce.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Simple ingredients, flavorful chicken.

    Ingredients for lemon chicken marinade and grilled chicken breasts.

    Lemon Marinade Ingredients

    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is best for lemon chicken marinade. It adds nice flavor.
    • Acidic component: Fresh lemon juice for the best flavor.
    • Herbs: Start fresh parsley and add another fresh herb of choice to the mix; thyme, dill, rosemary, mint, cilantro, basil, and oregano are all tasty.
    • Garlic: Use fresh garlic cloves, zested fine to blend in easily.
    • Mustard: Mustard naturally emulsifies marinade and Dijon gives it a little tang. Use a smooth Dijon for great flavor.
    • Honey: Just a little sweetness to temper the tart lemon flavor. For zero-sugar use this sugar-free honey (it's what I use).

    For Grilled Chicken

    • Chicken: Boneless, skinless chicken breasts work beautifully and are so easy. Boneless chicken thighs work too if you like dark meat. If you prefer chicken tenderloins (chicken tenders), marinate and grill using a grill basket so they don't fall through the grates. They cook quickly.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Here's a great way to use these lemon chicken breasts, to top a Caesar pasta salad. It's a family-pleasing entree salad.

    Chef's Tip: Buying chicken. Buy raw chicken by weight, not pieces, as chicken breasts really vary in size. Depending on your appetites, figure 6-8 ounces per person. Leftovers are great, do don't worry about cooking extra. Use it for a terrific leftover chicken salad for the next day's lunch with extra lemon chicken marinade as salad dressing.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vary the fresh herbs that you choose.
    • Fresh herbs really work the best in this lemon chicken marinade, but dried or part dried can be substituted. For example, start with 1 tablespoons of fresh chopped Italian parsley as it's usually available, then add approximately a ½ teaspoon of 1 dried herb to the mix, then blend and taste. Allow the dried herbs time to rehydrate before using.
    • Use all fresh oregano and mint and make it more of a Greek chicken marinade.
    • Substitute ½ teaspoon garlic powder or granulated garlic for 2 fresh garlic cloves.
    • Make it a lime chicken marinade with fresh squeezed lime juice or a combination or lime juice and lemon juice.

    For another delicious marinade option, use my homemade Italian dressing recipe.

    Recipe instructions

    Lemon vinaigrette ingredients in a jar, not blended.
    Step 1: Add the marinade ingredients to a blender container.
    Lemon chicken marinade with herbs blended until creamy.
    Step 2: Blend marinade for a few seconds until creamy and smooth.
    Raw boneless skinless chicken breasts in a casserole dish.
    Step 3: Gently pound chicken breasts to a more even size at the thicker end.
    Boneless chicken breasts marinating in a white casserole dish.
    Step 4: Add part (not all) of the lemon marinade to the chicken, turning to coat well in a baking dish.
    Grilled chicken breasts on the grill, with nice grill marks.

    Step 5: Marinate chicken 60 minutes on the kitchen counter, indoors. Yes, this is food safe to do. Get the grill ready, drain off marinade and grill chicken on a pre-heated grill until done, approximately 12-15 minutes in total depending on the heat of your grill and the thickness of the chicken breasts.

    As soon as you pull the chicken breasts off the grill, brush them (use a pastry brush) with fresh lemon chicken marinade to add flavor and moisture for juicy chicken.

    How to Pound Chicken Breasts

    Why pound chicken breasts? Because you won't get a dry or undercooked thicker end. Chicken breasts grill more evenly giving you much better results. No more dry chicken.

    Place between layers of plastic wrap, in a zip bag, or directly on a cutting board, smooth side up. Pound boneless, skinless chicken breasts to a more even thickness focusing on the thicker end when pounding. Don't pound so hard as to tear the meat.

    For pounding, use a handy buy-it-once in your life meat pounder tool, or the flat bottom of a small heavy skillet. You'll get better control with the meat pounder.

    Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs and grilled lemon halves.

    Tips for Perfect Grilled Chicken Breasts

    • Be sure the grill grates are clean and oiled before starting.
    • To get perfect grill marks, use the 10:00-2:00 rule. Start the pieces angled at 10:00, then rotate the piece to 2:00 after grill marks have formed. You can also just go one direction and not turn them.
    • Start grilling on the top or presentation side (rounded side) for great grill marks, then turn and finish for a few minutes, about 11-13 minutes in total depending on the heat of your grill. I grill mine for about 8 minutes on the top and another 3-4 on the flip side.
    • Chicken is done at an internal temperature of 165°F, so grill just a few degrees short and pull them off the grill. The temperature will rise after taking off the grill and chicken stays moist.

    For another chicken cutlet recipe, try these air fryer chicken cutlets. Dinner made in minutes.

    Serving Suggestions

    As the lemon chicken marinade intentionally makes extra, serve grilled chicken breasts with fresh marinade as the sauce. It's delicious! Here are a few great sides for lemon chicken marinade and grilled chicken breasts:

    • Sweet corn succotash with bacon (or without)
    • Healthy homemade coleslaw (lightly creamy)
    • Baby Dutch yellow potatoes
    • This easy, no-cook 3-bean salad.
    • Simple 5 minute green beans

    Extra garlic lemon chicken marinade works beautifully as a salad dressing or to dress grilled vegetables, like this grilled zucchini, another terrific side dish for grilled chicken breasts.

    For the perfect dessert, serve this easy lemon posset. Make it in minutes!

    Lemon chicken marinade with herbs blended until creamy.

    Recipe FAQs

    Does marinating chicken make any difference?

    Marinating chicken adds flavor. According to Harold McGee, world renowned authority and award winning author on the chemistry of food and cooking, "today meats are marinated primarily to flavor them and to make them more moist and tender". The acid in marinades does weaken muscle tissue and increase its ability to retain moisture, but marinades penetrate slowly, and not much in the case of chicken.

    Longer marinating time is not the answer, as chicken can get a mushy texture and from the acid in the citrus juice. Long marinate times generally do you (or your chicken) no good. Where marinating imparts more flavor is when cooking thin slices of meat, as in sliced skirt steak or chicken for stir fry.

    All that being said, I pound my chicken breasts to a more even thickness, marinate for 1 hour, and finish it with clean marinade immediately after grilling. It's moist, juicy, and delicious.

    How long should you marinate chicken?

    For boneless, skinless chicken, 60 minutes is enough time to impart flavor and a little moisture. It's food-safe to marinate chicken on an indoor kitchen counter if the temperature is under 90°F for up to an hour: for longer, refrigerate. Most kitchens are not near that temperature. You really don't need to marinate chicken any longer anyway.

    What are the 3 main ingredients when marinating?

    Oil, acid, and flavorings such as garlic and herbs are the basics for a good marinade.

    More Recipes With Lemon

    Do you love lemon? Me too! Try a few of these lemon recipes. And if you have an ice cream maker, try this delicious homemade lemon ice cream for a real summer treat.

    • creamy tahini salad dressing
      Creamy Lemon Tahini Salad Dressing
    • A golden slice of lemon olive oil cake, made wit whole almonds, served with berries and glaze.
      Super Moist Lemon Olive Oil Cake Recipe
    • lemon thyme brussels sprouts
      Sautéed Brussels Sprouts with Lemon and Thyme
    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Lemony Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.

    Lemon Chicken Marinade

    Sally Cameron
    It works as both a marinade for the raw chicken and a sauce to finish the grilled chicken at serving. Serve with grilled vegetables. Marinade yield is 1 cup; half for marinade and half to use as sauce after grilling. Recipe doubles easily.
    5 from 4 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Marinate time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 527 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender
    • Grill or barbecue
    • Mini blender great size for dressings
    • Microplane zester

    Ingredients
      

    Lemon chicken marinade (yield 1 cup)

    • ⅔ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • ⅓ cup freshly squeezed lemon juice 2 large lemons
    • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh herbs of choice parsley, mint, dill, rosemary, thyme
    • 2 teaspoons smooth Dijon mustard
    • 1-2 teaspoons honey or no-sugar honey
    • 2 large garlic cloves finely chopped or zested
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

    Chicken

    • 1 ½ - 2 pounds boneless skinless chicken breasts

    Instructions
     

    Make the marinade (makes extra)

    • Add all marinade ingredients to a blender and blend about 20 seconds until smooth and emulsified.

    Trim and prep the chicken

    • Place chicken breasts in a heavy duty zip style plastic bag smooth side up. Using a meat pounder, pound the thicker end of the chicken breasts to make them thinner and more even in thickness. Pound chicken firmly but not so hard that you tear the meat. Larger chicken breasts take more pounding than smaller ones.

    Marinate the chicken

    • Pour about 4-5 tablespoons of marinade or a little more into the zip bag and seal the bag pressing the air out. Refrigerate chicken 1 hour at room temperature or refrigerated. You can also marinate them in a flat casserole dish, turning to coat them well.

    Grill the chicken breasts

    • Before grilling, drain off marinade and discard. Place on a plastic film or parchment covered quarter sheet pan to transport to the grill.
    • Grill chicken until done, about 12-14 minutes depending on your grill and how thick the chicken is. Using a digital thermometer to test for temperature, pull chicken off the grill at 160 degrees. It will rise to the perfect 165° and stay juicy. Brush or drizzle with fresh lemon chicken marinade for added flavor and serve more on the side.
      Leftover chicken keeps up to 4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container, remember to label and date. Makes great chicken salad the next day.

    Notes

    Grilling Tips: 
    For a gas grill or pellet grill, heat grill on high until hot then clean the grates with a stiff grill brush. Turn the heat down to medium. Brush the grill grates with tongs and a wad of folded paper towels dipped in a little high heat oil to help prevent sticking. Place chicken breasts on the grill, smooth side down first.
    To get restaurant-worthy grill marks, think 10:00 and 2:00 like the positions on a clock. Start chicken breasts with one end pointed at 10 and allow the marks to develop, then move to 2 and you’ll get perfect grill marks. After a few minutes when the chicken is golden, turn the chicken breasts over and complete grilling on the other side.
    Nutritional calculation notes: As you don't consume all of the marinade at once, it is difficult to accurately calculate the numbers. Approximately half the marinade is used for the chicken then discarded, the other half used to finish and at serving. 
    Marinade per 2 tablespoons: 164 kcals, 18 gr fat, 1 carb, 0 protein.
    Chicken breast per 6 ounce servings: 185 kcals, 2 gr fat, 0 carbs, 39 protein. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2tablespoonsCalories: 527kcalCarbohydrates: 4gProtein: 36gFat: 41gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 28gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 109mgSodium: 518mgPotassium: 674mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 223IUVitamin C: 13mgCalcium: 18mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    White Bean Salad

    06/06/2011 by Sally Cameron 11 Comments

    A simple white bean salad in a wooden bowl with bits of lemon zest, herbs, and carrots and a serving spoon near.

    White beans, especially tender cannellini beans, make a fresh, versatile salad that's perfect for summer. Whether you're pulling a can from the pantry or cooking a pot of dried beans from scratch, this white bean salad comes together easily and delivers bright, satisfying flavor. Tossed with fresh lemon, herbs, garlic, and shallot, this white bean salad is delicious on its own, piled over fresh greens, or served alongside your favorite grilled mains.

    White Bean Salad

    Using canned beans are perfect for quick, last-minute meals, while dried beans cooked from scratch offer a little extra flavor and texture if you have the time. A slow simmer brings out their creamy interior and delicate taste - perfect for simple, healthy dishes like this summer white bean salad. Cannellini beans are my favorite for their tender, buttery texture, but great northern, navy, or small white beans all work beautifully. Just add plenty of fresh herbs, good olive oil, lemon, and seasoning for a side that pairs effortlessly with grilled chicken, shrimp, pork, or beef.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This White Bean Salad

    • Quick and easy - Made with simple, healthy ingredients.
    • Versatile - Serve as a side, over fresh greens, or alongside grilled meats.
    • Meal prep friendly - Keeps well in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • Customizable - Use cannellini, great northern, navy, or small white beans and swap in your favorite fresh herbs.

    Hee's another super easy bean salad recipe - three bean salad.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Use dried cooked beans or canned beans for speed and convenience, just rinse and drain well.

    • White beans - Cooked beans, either start with dried and cook or use canned. Cannellini beans are my first choice.
    • Shallot - Finely chopped for mild, aromatic flavor.
    • Garlic - Freshly minced, optional for extra punch.
    • Herbs - Fresh chopped parsley, basil, dill, or mint add flavor (use a combo).
    • Lemon - Use juice and zest for citrusy bright flavor and aroma.
    • Olive oil - Good quality extra virgin olive oil for the vinaigrette.
    • Vinegar - Choose white wine vinegar, red wine vinegar, apple cider vinegar.
    • Dijon mustard - Adds a little tang and depth to the vinaigrette and emulsifies it.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Chef's tip on buying dried beans: Buy from a store with good turnover to make sure they're fresh-older beans can take much longer to cook and sometimes never soften properly. Ideally, use dried beans within two years of harvest for the best texture and flavor. Discovering Napa Valley-based Rancho Gordo heirloom beans got me cooking with dried beans versus always reaching for canned.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Add cheese - Crumbled Greek feta or goat cheese adds tangy flavor, but skip it for dairy-free or vegan diners.
    • Change the allium - Swap in finely chopped chives or white onion for a different flavor profile.
    • Try other beans - Great Northern, navy, or small white beans all work well, canned or cooked from dried.
    • Add carrot - For extra color and a hint of sweetness, fold in a small finely chopped carrot. If you simmer dried beans with a carrot, finely chop some of the cooked carrot and mix it into the salad.

    if you love beans in salads, try this corn and black bean salad made with frozen corn and canned black beans so it's easy!

    How to Make a White Bean Salad

    If using dried beans, rinse and soak beans before going to bed. The next day, drain and cook them in the morning, then finish the salad when ready to serve. You can also cook the beans a day or two ahead of time and keep refrigerated in an airtight container until ready to complete the salad and serve.

    1. Make the vinaigrette.
    2. Chop the shallot and herbs, zest the lemon.
    3. Add the white beans to a medium bowl and toss with the vinaigrette, herbs, and zest. Season with salt and pepper.

    For a cool weather creamy soup using cannellini beans, try this creamy fennel soup.

    Chef's tip: Let the flavors meld. For the best flavor, let the white bean salad stand at room temperature for 20-30 minutes before serving. This gives the beans time to absorb the vinaigrette and the flavors to meld beautifully. Serve at room temperature for maximum flavor, or chill slightly if you're serving it on a hot day.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve chilled or at room temperature with lots of fresh herbs and a little olive oil. This simple white bean salad is a terrific side dish for grilled chicken and meat, or burgers and seafood.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make white bean salad ahead of time?

    Absolutely. This white bean salad holds up well and actually tastes better after a few hours as the flavors meld. Store it in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    Can I add other vegetables or ingredients?

    Yes! Feel free to add extras like halved cherry tomatoes, diced cucumber, crumbled feta cheese, or a handful of arugula for variety. For some kick, add chopped jalapeno pepper.

    More Salad Recipes

    Looking for more salad inspiration? Here are a few more ideas-none of them green! Salad can be so much more than leafy greens. Be sure to check out the full Salads Recipe Index for even more fresh, creative options.

    • Cold green bean salad with cherry tomatoes, corn, feta and red onion in a white bowl.
      Cold Green Bean Salad With Tomatoes and Corn
    • Colorful 3-bean salad in a glass bowl with a serving spoon.
      Easy Three Bean Salad Recipe
    • A white bowl of lentil quinoa salad with basil leaves and a serving spoon.
      Lentil Quinoa Salad with Lemon Vinaigrette
    • Chopped cucumber salad in a gray bowl with feta cheese crumbles and green herbs.
      Cucumber and Dill Salad with Feta

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this white bean salad, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A simple white bean salad in a wooden bowl with bits of lemon zest, herbs, and carrots and a serving spoon near.

    White Bean Salad

    Sally Cameron
    Wheter you cook dried beans or use canned, this salad is easy, fresh, and satisfying with the flavors of herbs and olive oil.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 175 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 cups cooked cannellini beans canned or from dried
    • 1 small shallot finely chopped
    • 1 garlic clove finely chopped or zested fine
    • ¼ cup fresh chopped herbs such as parsley, basil, or mint
    • 1 lemon for zest
    • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon vinegar ACV, champagne, red wine, or white wine
    • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
    • 1 small garlic clove finely zested

    Instructions
     

    For dried beans start here

    • If using canned beans, drain and rinse well. If starting with dried beans, soak overnight, then cook until tender, drain, and cool.

    For canned beans start here

    • Make the vinaigrette. In a small bowl, whisk together olive oil, vinegar, Dijon mustard, lemon juice, a finely zested small garlic clove, and a pinch of salt and pepper.
    • In a large bowl, combine the beans, chopped shallot, garlic (if using), lemon zest, and herbs. Pour the vinaigrette over the salad and toss gently to coat.
      Taste and adjust seasoning with additional salt, pepper, or lemon juice as needed.Serve immediately or chill slightly before serving.

    Notes

    Other beans if you can't find cannellini beans, use small white beans, navy beans, or Great Northerns beans.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 175kcalCarbohydrates: 22gProtein: 7gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gSodium: 15mgPotassium: 453mgFiber: 5gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 58IUVitamin C: 10mgCalcium: 76mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Updated 8-12-19

    Burrata Caprese with Fresh Tomatoes

    08/03/2024 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    Plate of red, yellow and burgundy tomatoes with burrata and basil.

    For a terrific spin on a classic Caprese Salad, swap the mozzarella cheese for creamy Burrata cheese and you've got a delicious Burrata Caprese. All it needs is fresh basil leaves and a drizzle of good extra virgin olive oil and you're set. Simply slice, arrange, and enjoy. Don't miss out on making this Burrata Caprese before summer (and peak tomato season) fades away.

    A white oval platter of colorful sliced heirloom tomatoes with burrata cheese and basil leaves and crostini.

    My husband loves burrata so much I tease him it's his middle, so this burrata caprese is a summer favorite recipe. Burrata is a heavenly, gooey delight, and making this style Caprese salad is so simple. No cooking, just slicing fresh tomatoes, arranging and garnishing.  It's the perfect example of the power of simplicity, allowing great ingredients to shine.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • A simple recipe with simple ingredients.
    • Makes beautiful use of fresh summer tomatoes and delicious Italian Burrata cheese.
    • A great side dish for summer fare like grilled meats.
    • It's the perfect summer salad.

    For an appetizer style Caprese on a stick, try this recipe. It's great for entertaining and easily made ahead.

    Burrata Caprese Ingredients

    Ingredients for a Caprese salad, colorful tomatoes, olive oil, basil leaves, burrata cheese, balsamic.
    • Cheese: With a creamy center, burrata comes in a container with liquid to keep it moist as it's fragile and perishable compared to mozzarella cheese.
    • Tomatoes: Use whatever you prefer, whether heirloom tomatoes, cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes, Roma tomatoes, or even a combination of the two. Choose what looks best. A blend of colorful tomatoes give it great eye appeal.
    • Fresh herbs: Fresh fragrant basil leaves are a must! Baby leaves can be scattered over the Burrata Caprese without chopping. Larger leaves can be rolled lengthwise like a cigar and sliced thin crosswise.
    • Oil: Here's the perfect place to break out your best olive oil to drizzle over the top. Here's the California extra virgin olive oil I buy (not an affiliate code).
    • Bread: This Caprese works beautifully with or without bread. If you want to serve it with bread, slices of grilled or toasted baguette are perfect to smear with Burrata and layer with tomatoes and basil. How to make crostini is below.
    • Balsamic: Use either good balsamic vinegar or a balsamic glaze, sometimes called a syrup or reduction. Here's my homemade Balsamic Glaze recipe. (optional).

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper.

    For another super tomato recipe, check out these roasted cherry tomatoes. Use a variety of colors, like the reds and sweet sun golds.

    Chef's Note: So what is Burrata? It's a soft Italian cheese that has a mozzarella shell filled with cream and mozzarella curds. Find it in the cheese section in a carton. Balls usually are 4 ounces and often come 2 to a package. While the official package serving is 1 ounce of cheese (not in my house), I figure 2 ounces minimum of burrata per person. Drain the liquid before using. It's best to buy only what you will use as Burrata is perishable. Once you cut into it, use it right away or within 1-2 days tops.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Swap the tomatoes for ripe summer peaches or other stone fruit.
    • Try a high quality flavored extra virgin olive oil such as lemon or basil olive oil.
    • If you can't get Burrata, look for buffalo milk mozzarella or other fresh mozzarella cheese.
    • Serve with arugula leaves or try adding Prosciutto. The salty flavor is nice against the sweet tomatoes.

    Recipe Instructions

    Making a Burrata Caprese is just slicing and assembly. What could be easier?

    White cutting board on a marble counter with slices of colorful large tomatoes and a knife.
    • Step 1: Slice tomatoes. If you're using heirloom tomatoes, slice them crosswise. If using cherry tomatoes, halve or quarter them depending on their size.
    • Step 2: Layer tomatoes on a large plate, platter with a slightly rimmed edge to catch all of the juicy goodness.
    • Step 3: Drain liquid from the Burrata and place in the center of the tomatoes. You can leave them whole for presentation and lightly score the ball of burrata with a sharp knife, or gently tear them apart to get things started.
    • Step 4: Drizzle the tomatoes and cheese with olive oil and scatter basil leaves over the top. For larger leaves, roll them together lengthwise into a cigar then slice crosswise into thin ribbons (called chiffonade).

    For another terrific tomato recipe, try this smoked salsa made on a pellet grill.

    Chef's tip: How to easily slice tomatoes? Use a serrated knife. A serrated bread knife is too long and unwieldy, but you can get inexpensive smaller serrated knives sometimes called tomato knives. They make it easy to slice tomatoes and are a terrific tool to add to your collection.

    Serving Suggestions

    Traditionally a Caprese has basil leaves tucked between the layers of tomatoes and cheese and is dressed with good olive oil. Another serving option, add a drizzle of good quality balsamic vinegar or a balsamic glaze.

    Balsamic glaze dripping off a silver and gold spoon into a glass jar.

    For a dinner party or summer entertaining, serve Burrata Caprese with a basket of crusty bread or toasted crostini.

    Because we love basil, sometimes I dress it with a fresh basil pesto vinaigrette. Stir a tablespoon or two of classic basil pesto into olive oil, liquifying the pesto, and you get a fragrant emerald green dressing.

    Chef' tip: For serving I like to sprinkle the top with a coarse kosher salt or a flaky sea salt. When you bite into the larger salt crystal, the crunch is nice against the creamy texture of the fresh burrata cheese and the juicy tomatoes. 

    Plate of red, yellow and burgundy tomatoes with burrata and basil.

    Recipe FAQs

    What kind of tomatoes are best for Caprese Salad?

    Whatever is best at the market. Mid to late summer is when you'll find the best tomatoes. Colorful heirloom tomatoes, Roma tomatoes, cherry tomatoes, grape tomatoes, beefsteak tomatoes, all work. Use one type or combine them on your serving platter.

    Can I make Caprese Salad ahead of time?

    A Caprese Salad or a Burrata Caprese is best made right before serving. To save a little time, slice the tomatoes and lay them out on a parchment or plastic film lined rimmed baking sheet, wrap and refrigerate until serving time. If using mozzarella cheese, slice it ahead of time as well like the tomatoes and refrigerate until time for assembly. If using burrata cheese, don't drain it until your tomatoes are assembled, then add the Burrata and basil leaves.

    Is Burrata Caprese Salad served cold or at room temperature?

    It's best served at room temperature as cold dulls the tastes of the sweet ripe tomatoes and creamy burrata cheese. If you've pre-sliced the tomatoes and refrigerated them, get them out of the cold and let them come closer to room temperature for full enjoyment.

    More Summer Seasonal Recipes

    Summer is the best time for not only sweet tomatoes, but corn, watermelon, cucumbers and more, so take advantage of what's best and enjoy it while it's in season.

    • roasted tomato marinara
      The Best Roasted Tomato Sauce
    • Cold green bean salad with cherry tomatoes, corn, feta and red onion in a white bowl.
      Cold Green Bean Salad With Tomatoes and Corn
    • Watermelon salad ready to serve with cucumber, feta, basil, shallots.
      Easy Watermelon Basil Salad with Feta Cheese
    • Closeup of corn succotash with red and green peppers and bacon.
      Sweet Corn Succotash with Bacon

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    Let me know if you made this burrata caprese by adding a comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Plate of red, yellow and burgundy tomatoes with burrata and basil.

    Burrata Caprese Salad

    Sally Cameron
    Choose the best fresh ripe tomatoes you can find. If you can't get burrata cheese, substitute buffalo milk mozzarella, or good mozzarella. Skip the hard rubbery balls. Serve as a delightful starter, side dish, or even a light lunch with some fresh bread and prosciutto.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer, Salad
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 4
    Calories 237 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 large fresh tomatoes heirloom, Roma, beefsteak
    • 8 ounces burrata cheese or buffalo milk mozzarella
    • ¾ ounce fresh basil leaves or half a bunch.
    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt crunchy kosher salt is nice
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1-2 tablespoons Balsamic vinegar, glaze, or syrup optional

    Instructions
     

    Burrata caprese

    • Slice tomatoes about ¼″ thick and place on a platter or plate. Place the burrata in the center of the tomatoes. Leave whole or score into quarters and let it start to slide apart. Tuck fresh basil leaves in here and there or scatter them over the top.
    • Optional basil vinaigrette
    • For dressing, stir together the basil pesto and olive oil until it's a thin dressing. Drizzle over the salad and season with salt and pepper.

    Notes

    Substitutions and Variations
    • Swap the tomatoes for ripe summer peaches or nectarines
    • Drizzle the top with good Balsamic vinegar or a homemade Balsamic Glaze.
    • Try a high quality flavored extra virgin olive oil such as lemon or basil olive oil
    • If you can't get Burrata cheese, look for buffalo milk mozzarella. And if you can't find that, get the best mozzarella available
    • For salad greens, add arugula.
    • For a little protein, serve slices of prosciutto, rolled or ruffled, alongside.
    For instructions on how to make my golden, garlic crostini, please see the post. 
    •  
    •  
    •  

    Nutrition

    Calories: 237kcalCarbohydrates: 7gProtein: 11gFat: 22gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 40mgSodium: 155mgPotassium: 436mgFiber: 2gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 1966IUVitamin C: 25mgCalcium: 321mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Grilled Shrimp Wrapped with Prosciutto

    08/29/2011 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    rosemary grilled shrimp with prosciutto

    Now that my Tuscan Blue rosemary bushes are big, I trim long sprigs and soak them in water to use for skewers of grilled shrimp wrapped with prosciutto.  A perfect alfresco Mediterranean dinner as summer nears the end.

    rosemary grilled shrimp with prosciutto
    Rosemary grilled shrimp with prosciutto

    Long associated with Mediterranean cuisine, the strong, piney fragrance of rosemary is unmistakable. It grows everywhere in California. Besides being great for landscaping (because its drought tolerant), it smells wonderful in the yard and is always ready for culinary needs.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredient Tips

    Buy large shrimp, the 13-15 size if possible. You need 4-6 ounces of Prosciutto, and slice the strips in half lengthwise to wrap the shrimp. The quick marinade is just olive oil, lemon juice and herbs.

    Raw shrimp skewered for the grill.
    Raw shrimp skewered for the grill.

    Instructions

    Marinate the cleaned and shelled shrimp for about 30 minutes at room temperature, then skewer, wrap with Prosciutto and grill for about 5-6 minutes. Easy, simple, and totally delicious.

    Raw shrimp wrapped with prosciutto.
    Raw shrimp wrapped with prosciutto.

    Rosemary Skewers

    For the rosemary skewers I cut sturdy pieces about 14″ in length. If you don't grow it, find a neighbor who does.  Soak the springs in cold water to cover for 30 minutes. With your fingers, strip off the bottom three quarters of the leaves.

    This becomes the skewer. If the top green part gets a bit charred during grilling, stick a small sprig of fresh green rosemary in the top at serving.

    grilled shrimp | afoodcentriclife.com

    If all you can find is short sprigs at the grocery store they work great as an appetizer too. I discovered that the rosemary did not give the dish as much flavor as I expected, but it looked terrific and smelled lovey.

    Use Bamboo or Metal

    Of course this works with bamboo and metal skewers. The rosemary is more for presentation. Do what is easiest for you.

    Serving Ideas

    Serve the skewers on a bed of wild and brown rice or quinoa dressed with a little olive oil and some fresh herbs and you have a fast, easy and healthy dinner. Sometimes I brush the shrimp with a little maple syrup before grilling for extra flavor.

    For a low carb options, make cauliflower puree. Add a big green salad with some goat cheese crumbles, tomatoes or whatever "goodies" you like on a salad

    For ideas on how to build a better salad, read here.

    Leftovers

    Save an extra grilled shrimp and refrigerate until the next day. Add to a salad for lunch cold.

    📖 Recipe

    grilled shrimp | afoodcentriclife.com

    Grilled Shrimp Wrapped with Prosciutto on Rosemary Skewers

    Sally Cameron
    If you have rosemary in your garden, clip 14″ long sturdy sprigs to make skewers. If you don't, use wooden skewers and stick shorter rosemary sprigs in the top for flair and fragrance when you serve.  This is nice served on a bed of brown and wild rice with a tossed green salad.  Drizzle with a little good quality olive oil and maybe a squeeze of lemon as you serve. Another tasty option, brush shrimp with maple syrup before grilling. THIS DOUBLES EASILY FOR FOUR.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Seafood
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 4
    Calories 429 kcal

    Equipment

    • Skewers for grilling

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
    • 2 teaspoons paprika
    • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped fresh rosemary
    • 4 14" springs of fresh rosemary or bamboo skewers soaked in cold water to cover about 30 minutes
    • 1 ½ pounds jumbo shrimp shelled and deveined
    • 4-6 ounces Prosciutto
    • 3 tablespoons pure maple syrup optional

    Instructions
     

    • Combine olive oil, lemon juice, paprika, garlic, salt and pepper in a small bowl and whisk or stir together. Add shrimp, toss and let stand at room temperature about 30 minutes. At the same time soak your rosemary sprigs or bamboo skewer sticks.
    • Hold rosemary sprigs and strip ¾ of the leaves off the bottom so you have room to skewer the shrimp.  Drain off marinade and discard. Skewer the shrimp through tail and top, about 5 per skewer. It will depend on the size of shrimp you have.
    • Slice Prosciutto into long thins strips about an inch or two wide and wrap them around the shrimp. They probably won't wrap or look perfect, but don't worry about it.  They'll taste great.
    • Grill shrimp skewers on a hot, clean grill about 5-6 minutes total depending on the size of your shrimp and how hot your grill is. When they start to turn pink, turn the skewers.  When done, serve drizzled with a little olive oil.

    Notes

    Another option - brush the skewers with a little maple syrup for extra flavor. The sweetness of the maple syrup is wonderful with the Prosciutto.
    Note on serving – if your rosemary ends get blackened while grilling, add a sprig or two  of fresh, short rosemary sprigs to the ends when serving. Serve over a wild and brown rice blend with a tossed green salad.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 429kcalCarbohydrates: 12gProtein: 39gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 13gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 447mgSodium: 1657mgPotassium: 255mgFiber: 1gSugar: 9gVitamin A: 105IUVitamin C: 15mgCalcium: 275mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Baked Halibut with Roasted Cherry Tomatoes

    04/12/2011 by Sally Cameron 11 Comments

    Roast halibut with tomatoes.

    Mild flavored and pearly white, there is nothing like fresh baked halibut.  I'm always happy when spring arrives and halibut comes into season. With a container of cherry tomatoes left over from a catered dinner the night before, I had my inspiration for my halibut with roasted cherry tomatoes. An easy, healthy, delicious dinner.

    roast halibut

    While fresh halibut is pricey, I keep the portions just right and know that's it's cheaper than going to a restaurant for a nice dinner. The roasted cherry tomatoes make a terrific savory accompaniment and any leftover tomatoes are terrific.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Baked Halibut

    • Makes great use of seasonal ingredients.
    • Make tomatoes ahead of time for a faster dinner.
    • The flavors are absolutely delicious.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    For baked halibut

    • Fresh halibut: depending on the thickness (or thinness) of your halibut filets, the method can be adjusted.
    • Olive oil: Halibut is very lean, needs some fat and the flavor of olive oil is beautiful
    • Lemon: Fresh lemon wedges are a nice garnish to squeeze over the top.

    For roasted cherry tomatoes

    • Tomatoes: Get cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes, either all red or in a combination of colors.
    • Olive oil: To toss the tomatoes in for roasting
    • Garlic: Use fresh, finely chopped cloves. Zesting with a microplane is easy and fast.
    • Herbs: For this recipe, fresh thyme is best.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If you can't get fresh thyme, use fresh rosemary.
    • To use dried thyme or Herbs de Provence, mix the olive oil with the dried herbs and give them a little time to rehydrate to allow the flavors to bloom.

    Recipe Instructions

    Start with the tomatoes

    Toss halved tomatoes with a generous tablespoon of fresh chopped thyme leaves, a couple cloves of finely minced or zested fresh garlic, olive oil, salt and pepper and roast them until they're shriveled and browning a bit at the edges.

    Roasting tomatoes develops an amazing flavor as their sweetness concentrates and the fresh thyme is a great compliment.

    How to Buy Fish

    When you buy fresh halibut figure 4-6 ounces per person. That's not only portion control, but budget control. The filet I purchased was very thick; two inches to be exact. Most halibut is not this thick, but if you find it, it's terrific. Thinner filets work just fine. Be aware they will bake faster.

    Baked Halibut: Different Methods

    Searing halibut on the stovetop then quickly finishing in a hot oven is a restaurant trick. The whole process takes about 10 minutes in total, but you can vary it for the halibut you have.

    In the winter when I can only get thinner local halibut filets, I still make this by reducing the cooking time. For thin filets it might take just a minute or two in the oven or you might even be able to cook it just on the stove top. Fresh cod filets work too. Get what fish looks good in your local area.

    For thinner filets there are two options: 1) bake in the oven with no searing, skipping the browned crust, or 2) searing then turning and finishing in the pan, stovetop. In that case what I do is splash in a little white wine, cover immediately, and finish for a few minutes.

    All cooking methods are delicious, so use what works best for the halibut you buy.

    Halibut in a pan cooking

    How to Bake Halibut: Sear and Roast

    Season fish with salt, pepper, and granulated garlic. Heat a non-stick pan over medium heat and drizzle in a little olive oil. When the oil is hot but not smoking, place the halibut filets in the pan presentation side (or top side) down. The fish should sizzle when it hits the hot pan.

    Allow the halibut to sear for about three minutes, until it has a golden crust when you peak underneath. Carefully turn the fish over and sear for one minute longer.

    Place halibut on a parchment or foil lined rimmed baking sheet and roast at 425°F for approximately 6 minutes, depending on the thickness of the fish. If the filets are thinner they will roast more quickly so adjust your timing down.

    How to Know When the Fish is Done

    Your halibut should still be moist and barely translucent in the center, not dry and flaky. Don't over cook it to keep it moist. If your are not sure, use a digital thermometer. The fish should reach 140°F - 145°F in the center. It will feel firm but still have just a little give.

    Without a digital thermometer, do this. Test if your fish is done is by using a thin metal skewer or cake tester tool. Place it in the middle of the filet for a 5 seconds and remove it. Hold it close to your upper lip or inner wrist to feel the heat. Sounds crazy but it works. If the center is warm, not hot, the fish should be ready.

    Crusted halibut in a pan.

    Finish and Serve

    To serve, drizzle with a little finishing olive oil and a squeeze of lemon, then spoon on the tomatoes. Garnish with chopped parsley, thyme or chives if desired.

    Roast halibut with tomatoes.

    📖 Recipe

    Roast halibut with tomatoes.

    Baked Halibut with Roasted Cherry Tomatoes

    Sally Cameron
    Mild meaty halibut seared and roasted, then topped with sweet herb roasted baby tomatoes makes a terrific, easy and healthy dinner. Serve with a green vegetable and tossed green salad with a tangy vinaigrette. Choose thick halibut filets if possible.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 25 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 35 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, fish, Seafood
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 183 kcal

    Equipment

    • Non-stick pan for fish
    • Half sheet baking tray for tomatoes

    Ingredients
      

    Roasted Cherry Tomatoes

    • 16 ounces sweet cherry tomatoes halved
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 2 large garlic cloves finely chopped
    • 1 ½ tablespoons fresh chopped thyme leaves
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Baked Halibut

    • 4  4 ounce halibut filets Thicker is better
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt to taste
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 4 lemon wedges optional

    Instructions
     

    Remove halibut from refrigerator

    • If the fish is cold from the refrigerator, allow it to stand at room temperature for 45 minutes to get the chill off. Start the tomatoes while the fish is warming up. Cover a rimmed backing sheet with parchment or foil and set aside for baking the halibut.

    Roast the tomatoes

    • Pre-heat the oven to 375°F degrees. Cover a rimmed baking sheet with foil or parchment. In a small bowl, toss halved tomatoes with olive oil, garlic, thyme, salt and pepper. Spread tomatoes on the baking sheet and roast for 20-25 minutes until shriveled and edges are just starting to turn a bit brown. Timing will depend on your oven. Mine take 25 minutes on the convection setting.

    Bake the halibut

    • Pre-heat the oven to 425 degrees. Place a non-stick skillet or fry pan over medium heat and add oil. Season halibut with salt and pepper. When the oil is hot but not smoking, place the halibut top side down in the pan. Allow a golden crust to form, about 3 minutes. Turn the halibut over and sear 1 minute longer. Remove the halibut to your prepared baking sheet.
    • Bake halibut in the oven for approximately 6 minutes for 2″ thick filets. If your filets are thinner, bake for a shorter time. When done, halibut will be moist and barely opaque in the center. Temperature should be 145°F.

    Serve halibut

    • Serve with a drizzle of good olive oil and a squeeze of fresh lemon, topped with the roasted cherry tomatoes. Any extra tomatoes will keep in the refrigerator well covered for a few days and can be enjoy warm or even cold in a salad.

    Notes

    These bright, herb roasted tomatoes go great with fish and equally as well with chicken. Spoon some over an omelet like salsa or sprinkle into a salad. There are many ways to enjoy them. Next time you have a container of cherry tomatoes on the counter and don't know what to do with them, roast them. Try multi-color baby tomatoes for even more color.
    Fish Doneness Tip - Another way to test if your fish is done is by using a cake tester tool which is a very thin metal skewer. Place it in the middle of the filet for a few seconds and remove it. Hold it close to your upper lip or inner wrist to feel the heat. Sounds crazy but it works.  If the center is warm, not hot, the fish should be ready.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 183kcalCarbohydrates: 7gProtein: 23gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 56mgSodium: 381mgPotassium: 790mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 760IUVitamin C: 40mgCalcium: 40mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Sesame Crusted Salmon

    08/08/2011 by Sally Cameron 19 Comments

    black and white sesame salmon

    Many people enjoy salmon but shy away from cooking it at home. This easy, Asian-inspired sesame crusted salmon is here to change that. Coated with black and white sesame seeds for a beautiful, flavorful crust, it's perfect served warm over tender asparagus or chilled atop crisp salad greens. Whether for a quick weeknight dinner or effortless entertaining, this dish is sure to become a go-to favorite!

    Closeup of a salmon filet with a black and white sesame crust on asparagus spears.

    Salmon has so much to offer, from its vibrant color to its impressive health benefits, thanks to Omega-3 fatty acids. Not only is it visually stunning, but it's also a delicious and nutritious choice. Topped with sesame seeds for a satisfying crunch, sesame crusted salmon is a simple dish sure to be a hit with family and friends!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Salmon: 4-6 ounce salmon filets .
    • Oils: Sesame oil (regular or toasted), both are great for an Asian flavor profile.
    • Sesame seeds: Find sesame seeds in the Asian aisle of your grocer or sometimes in the spice aisle. Look for a black and white blend called "tuxedo mix" or buy the two colors and mix yourself.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    For another easy, delicious salmon recipe ready in just minutes, try this steamed salmon.

    Chef's Tip: Store sesame seeds in the refrigerator as they go rancid (spoil) if not stored properly due to their high oil content.

    Recipe Instructions

    Salmon crusted salmon can be cooked with skin on or off. If you want to skin it, here is how to skin salmon filets. You'll need a non-stick pan for this recipe.

    How to Skin Salmon Filets

    Skinning the salmon is optional. If you like the skin, leave it on.

    Showing how to skin salmon filets with a filet knife.

    Step 1: To remove the skin you will need a very sharp, thin, flexible knife (a filet knife or boning knife). Hold the edge of the salmon skin flat on your cutting board and slide your knife between the skin and flesh, angling the knife blade down just slightly. Slice completely under the flesh while holding the skin tight. It should come off in one clean piece.

    Turn the salmon over and discard the skin.

    Showing how to trim the purple bloodline from the underside of salmon.

    How to Trim Salmon Filets

    Step 2: This step is also optional. Trim off any dark purple flesh. This is the bloodline and it can be very strong in flavor. Some people don't mind it. I prefer to trim it off. Be careful to trim just the dark purple areas so you don't waste any of the salmon.

    Discard the bloodline, or if you have pets, cook it briefly for them in a non-stick pan. They'll love it as a healthy treat mixed into their food.

    Step 3: Turn the filet over and portion into two pieces if needed, either across the width or length depending on what you have.

    Step 4: Run your fingers over the filet sides for pin bones. Use tweezers or small pliers to remove them.

    Trimming a salmon filet and cutting into portions for cooking.

    Make the Sesame Crust

    When your salmon filets are trimmed and ready:

    Step 1: Brush the tops of the filets with a few drops of sesame or coconut oil and season the salmon with salt and pepper.

    Step 2: Place filets presentation side (top side) down on a plate of the mixed sesame seeds and press to coat.

    Step 3: Turn filets over and set aside to cook.

    Bright orange raw salmon on a plate fo black and white sesame seeds.
    Step 2
    Coating bright orange salmon filets with sesame seeds for a crusted top.
    Step 3

    How to Cook Salmon Filets

    Step 4: Heat 2 teaspoons of sesame or coconut oil in non-stick frying pan or skillet over medium heat. Carefully place fillets in the pan sesame seed side down. Don't move the fillets until a crust forms and the sesame seeds are looking golden.

    Carefully turn the fillets over, turn down the heat to low, cover, and allow the salmon to finish cooking until it's barely translucent in the center. Cooking time will depend on the thickness of your salmon filets, but it won't take long.

    Cook until an instant-read thermometer reads between 140°F - 145°F degrees. Sesame crusted salmon is ready to serve.

    How to Buy Salmon

    Fresh salmon should be moist, firm and have an ocean smell, not fishy or strong. The flesh should not be coming apart or tearing. In hot weather, ask the fish counter to package your salmon in a small bag of ice to transport it home and keep it fresh.

    Chef's Tip: Although many stores offer salmon, I drive a little further and pay a little more to get what I know is quality. The best choice continues to be fresh, wild King salmon from Alaska or California. When it's out of season check this salmon buying guide for the best options. Farmed salmon is getting better and is more available and affordable, but refer to the guide.

    For another great salmon recipe try this Raspberry Balsamic Salmon.

    📖 Recipe

    black and white sesame salmon

    Sesame Crusted Salmon

    Sally Cameron
    Serve salmon warm on roast or grilled asparagus spears or cool on a bed of baby spinach leaves with orange segments and a sesame-orange vinaigrette.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 12 minutes mins
    Total Time 22 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 241 kcal

    Equipment

    • Non-stick pan
    • Filet knife or other thin flexible sharp knife
    • Needle nose pliers or tweezers to remove any pins bones.

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 6 ounce salmon fillets skin yourself or have the seafood counter do it for you
    • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 2 teaspoons sesame or coconut oil
    • 3  tablespoons white sesame seeds
    • 3 tablespoons black sesame seeds

    Instructions
     

    Remove salmon from refrigerator

    • If the salmon is refrigerated, allow it to sit on the counter about 45 minutes to get the chill off.

    If skinning salmon, start here

    • Place salmon skin side down on a cutting board. With a thin, sharp knife (filet knife), slip the knife blade between the skin and salmon flesh with the blade facing away from you. Hold the edge of the skin on the board tightly and with your knife blade angles slightly down, slice between the skin and fish all the way to the end. Remove the skin completely. You should have a clean piece of skin to discard.

    If already skinned, start here

    • Turn the salmon over with the bottom up. Trim any dark purple bloodline with the filet knife. Gently run your fingers along the sides of the filets looking for pin bones. Remove bones with pliers or tweezers. With rounded side up, season salmon with salt and pepper blend.
    • Mix sesame seeds and place on a small flat plate. Drizzle sesame oil on each salmon filet and rub to coat the surface of the fish. Place salmon rounded side down in the sesame seeds and press gently to adhere. Remove salmon filets to a clean plate or waxed paper until ready to cook. Discard any leftover sesame seeds from the plate, as they have touched raw fish and cannot be saved.

    Cook salmon

    • Heat a non-stick pan over medium heat with coconut oil. When hot, place salmon filets sesame side down. Cook until sesame seeds are golden and a crust has formed.
      Carefully turn the fillets over, turn down the heat to low, cover, and allow the salmon to finish cooking until it’s barely translucent in the center. Cooking time will depend on the thickness of your salmon filets. It should be between 140°F - 145°F degrees with a digital thermometer.

    Notes

    Although many stores offer salmon, the best choice continues to be fresh, wild King salmon from Alaska, California, or British Columbia, but when it's out of season check this salmon buying guide for the best options.
    For sesame seeds, check the Asian aisle of your grocer or the spice aisle, and online. Sometimes the black and white mix is called "tuxedo mix". 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 241kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 34gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 1mgSodium: 147mgPotassium: 63mgFiber: 1gSugar: 0.04gVitamin A: 2IUCalcium: 118mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    California Shrimp Louie Salad

    05/06/2012 by Sally Cameron 11 Comments

    california shrimp louis salad

    Love big main course salads? Then you'll love this shrimp louie salad. It's a classic salad from California with crisp Romaine leaves, cucumbers, tomatoes, avocado, and hard boiled eggs with a terrific creamy dressing. It's a great entree salad for lunch or dinner and one salad you'll be eating all summer long. Gather your ingredients the day before, hard boil a few eggs, make the dressing and you're practically ready. Cook shrimp or use already cooked shrimp to make it easy.

    Shrimp Louis salad with vegetables and lettuce.

    She taught me to scramble eggs, make perfect white sauce, and chicken soup. How I miss being in the kitchen with my mom. In her memory, I recreated her favorite shrimp louie salad for Mother's Day.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Shrimp Louie Salad Recipe Highlights

    • A shrimp louie salad is a terrific entree salad for a high protein lunch or dinner.
    • Components are easily made ahead and either cooked or purchased.
    • The dressing works for more than just this salad.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Often done with pricey Dungeness crab, bay shrimp is an economical option for this salad. Cooked bay shrimp are available at most seafood counters and markets. They also come cooked and frozen, ready to go by quick thawing under cold water. If you can't find bay shrimp, use small cooked and shelled shrimp.

    Shrimp Louie Salad

    • Lettuce: Hearts of romaine lettuce or romaine are what to buy.
    • Shrimp: Already cooked bay shrimp are both tasty and economical. Find that at many seafood counters or frozen, or buy the smallest cooked shrimp that you can.
    • Eggs: Buy fresh raw eggs and hard boil them. For perfect easy peel hardboiled eggs follow these directions.
    • Tomatoes: Buy either sweet grape tomatoes or Roma tomatoes.
    • Avocado: Optional but a terrific addition to a shrimp louie salad.
    • Cucumber: Use either an English cucumber or Persian cucumbers.
    • Asparagus: Another optional but delicious addition.
    • Lemon: Serve wedges with the salad for a fresh zing of flavor.

    Louie Salad Dressing

    • Mayonnaise: Use a light, clean flavored mayonnaise. This is my favorite mayo.
    • Ketchup: Read labels and watch the unhealthy ingredients. Look for unsweetened ketchup.
    • Celery: For a little crunch and texture. Optional.
    • Garlic: Either a fresh garlic clove or garlic paste in a tube.
    • Lemon: You need lemon juice to bring the acid and freshness.
    • Hot sauce: Your favorite hot sauce, try Frank's original, Sriracha or Tabasco. Horseradish provides a nice kick too. If you like the heat, use a little of both.
    • Milk: To thin the louie dressing if needed.
    • Onion: Use either chives or scallions (traditional).
    Baskets full of grape and cherry tomatoes and grape tomatoes.

    Recipe Instructions

    Step 1: Start by making the dressing. Add all of the ingredients to a small bowl and whisk until smooth. If you are making quantity (alway good to have leftover dressing), use a blender.

    This dressing is so good that while I was shooting the photo I couldn't stop dipping cucumber slices in it and eating them, so it works as a good dip for raw veggies too.

    Step 2: Start by hard boiling the eggs. Here are my directions for easy peel eggs. You can make them 2-3 days ahead of time and refrigerated. When eggs are done and ice cold, peel.

    Step 3: While eggs are hard boiling, get the lettuce leaves, tomatoes, cucumbers, and asparagus (if using) ready. Slice the avocado right before serving.

    Step 4: When all ingredients are ready, assemble the shrimp louie salad, add the shrimp, and serve dressing on the side.

    Serving Suggestions

    Shrimp louie salad is a meal unto itself. If you'd like, serve with a crusty roll, garlic toast, crackers, or crostini. The classic San Francisco thing would be a slice of real California sourdough bread. If course, there is always dessert!

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you cook the shrimp for the salad?

    For a shrimp louie salad, most seafood counters sell pre-cooked shrimp, from tiny bay shrimp (perfect for a shrimp louie salad) to larger sizes to make it easy for you. To cook your own, buy whatever size shrimp you prefer and either broil, poach, or even grill the shrimp. Buy cleaned and shelled shrimp or clean and peel them yourself to save money.

    More Terrific Fresh Salad Recipes

    Salads are so wonderful, variable, and flavor-filled. There are so many ways to make them!

    • Cold green bean salad with cherry tomatoes, corn, feta and red onion in a white bowl.
      Cold Green Bean Salad With Tomatoes and Corn
    • Watermelon salad ready to serve with cucumber, feta, basil, shallots.
      Easy Watermelon Basil Salad with Feta Cheese
    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Lemony Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe
    • grilled shrimp and avocado bowls
      Grilled Shrimp Salad with Raspberry Vinaigrette

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this shrimp louie salad, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Shrimp Louie Salad | AFoodCentricLife.com

    California Louie Shrimp Salad

    Sally Cameron
    This classic west coast shrimp salad is easily assembled for a terrific lunch, brunch or picnic. Gather your ingredients the day before. Hard boil some eggs, wash the lettuce, and make your dressing. A crusty roll or garlic toast make a nice accompaniment. The dressing makes a great dip for raw veggies too. For a smooth, creamy dressing, skip the celery and sprinkle the chives over the salad.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 302 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Louis Dressing

    • 1 cup Vegenaise or your favorite mayonnaise
    • 3-4 tablespoons ketchup
    • 2 tablespoons finely chopped celery
    • 1 large garlic clove finely chopped
    • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice
    • 1-2 teaspoons hot sauce, Sriracha or Tabasco horseradish works too
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 2 tablespoons milk of choice to thin the dressing if desired

    Salad

    • 3 hearts of romaine lettuce
    • 1 pound cooked small shrimp
    • 4 hard boiled eggs
    • 16   sweet grape tomatoes or 4 Roma tomatoes quartered
    • 1 large avocado quartered and sliced
    • 3-4 Persian cucumbers or 1 English cucumber sliced thin
    • 12 spears of asparagus optional, but nice
    • 1 lemon cut into wedges
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped chives

    Instructions
     

    • Make the dressing a day ahead, cover and refrigerate. Hard boil eggs, cool, peel and refrigerate.
    • Wash romaine leaves and wrap loosely in paper towels placed in a zip bag to remain crisp. For asparagus spears, snap off the ends. Drop into boiling salted water and cook for 2 minutes depending on their thickness, or until crisp but tender when pierced with a sharp paring knife. Chill in a bowl of ice water immediately to stop the cooking process. Drain and refrigerate.
    • The day of serving, chop romaine leaves across for the salad base. Save a few leaf tops for a nice presentation if desired. Place romaine on a plate or in a shallow bowl. Top the greens with sliced avocado, tomatoes, egg quarters, and asparagus spears. Toss the shrimp with a little dressing. Place on top of the salad. Serve extra dressing on the side. If you want to thin the dressing for pouring, use a little milk.

    Notes

    This is perfect for busy days or special occasions, because you can make everything ahead and simply assemble to eat.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 302kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 33gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 472mgSodium: 953mgPotassium: 754mgFiber: 6gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 2559IUVitamin C: 24mgCalcium: 226mgIron: 5mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Tabouli Salad Recipe (Tabbouleh)

    09/01/2023 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    A close up of tabouli salad with tomatoes and green onion in a white bowl.

    What is tabouli? It's a classic Mediterranean parsley salad with refreshing mint, sweet tomatoes, and green onions dressed with a simple olive oil lemon dressing. I make tabouli with quinoa instead of traditional bulgur wheat for a twist and to make it gluten-free. It's an easy healthy dish that can be made ahead and served chilled, perfect for summertime. Don't be stumped by the multiple spellings; tabouli, tabouleh, tabbouleh, or taboula. They are all the same sensational dish.

    A bowl of tabouli with lots of green parsley, mint, tomatoes, quinoa, and pine nuts.

    One of my favorite things to make in summer is this easy tabbouleh recipe: a refreshing Lebanese salad with lots of fresh parsley. Lots! Forget about a sprig of parsley as a tossed aside garnish. Here finely chopped parsley is the main ingredient.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Many pairing possibilities with chicken, meat, fish and seafood.
    • A fresh salad with a handful of ingredients.
    • Make it ahead without dressing and dress at serving time.

    For another terrific parsley recipe try this mushroom and parsley pasta sauce. It's hearty and delicious, tasting meaty but no meat.

    Recipe Ingredients

    I've taken a little leeway with a traditional tabouli recipe to make it work for my family, using quinoa, adding cucumbers, and using red and green onion for color. Greek feta cheese is a nice add too, but omit it for a vegan tabouli salad.

    Fresh ingredients for tabouli (tabbouleh) with parsley, tomatoes, and herbs.

    Tabouli

    • Fresh herbs: Fresh parsley, either curly parsley or flat leaf parsley. I use flat leaf parsley because I grow it. Both work. You also need fresh mint leaves.
    • Grain: Instead of fine bulgur wheat I use quinoa for a twist and to make it gluten-free. Use either tri-color or white quinoa.
    • Cucumbers: Choose either Persian cucumbers or an English cucumber (aka hothouse cucumber). Be sure they are fresh, firm, and a nice deep green color.
    • Tomatoes: Roma tomatoes work best as they are meatier but use whatever is best at the market.
    • Onion: Red onion adds nice color but green onion is traditional. You can even use both.

    Lemon Vinaigrette

    • Olive oil: Use a good extra virgin olive oil. Lemon olive oil works too.
    • Lemon juice: Fresh squeezed here is best. Lime juice or a combination works too.
    • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves for the best flavor and pungency.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and quantities.

    Chef's tip on parsley: What kind of parsley is best for authentic tabbouleh? With a milder flavor and fluffier texture, curly parsley is traditional for tabouli. Flat-leaf parsley has bigger flavor and a softer texture than curly parsley. You can use either.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For grain options, use fine wheat bulgur, couscous (wheat), or millet (gluten-free).
    • A little cubed or crumbled feta cheese or goat cheese is a nice addition.
    • Want a little more texture and protein? Add canned rinsed and drained garbanzo beans.
    • Add pine nuts for their buttery crunch, often used in Mediterranean cuisine.
    • Diced avocado is terrific too (my lunch today).

    Chef's Tip on Herbs: Dry herbs chop much better than wet ones. Wash your herbs ahead of time then spin them dry in a salad spinner. Allow them to dry completely on a kitchen towel on the counter. Chop either by hand with a sharp knife or in a food processor. The trick to chopping the parsley in a food processor is 1) dry herbs 2) drop herbs in while the processor is running through center the feed tube.

    Recipe Instructions

    You can cook the quinoa and chop all of your veggies a day ahead of time and keep them separated in airtight containers without dressing. Combine and add dressing at the time of serving.

    Rinsing tri-color quinoa in a sieve with a sprayer.
    Step 1: Rinse quinoa well in a sieve with cold water. Do not skip this step.
    Cooking quinoa in a pot on the stovetop.
    Step 2: Cook the quinoa for 15 minutes. See package directions.
    Quinoa cooling after cooking spread on a sheet tray.
    Step 3: Spread quinoa on a flat baking sheet to cool quickly and stay fluffy.
    Separating the parsley leaves from the stems on a cutting board.
    Step 4: Separate parsley leaves from the stems.
    Chopped green parsley in the bowl of a food processor.
    Step 5: Drop the parsley leaves into the food processor feed tube while running to chop fine, or chop by hand.
    How to dice tomatoes, on a cutting board.
    Step 6: Seed and dice your tomatoes. For how to dice tomatoes, see below.
    Chopping cucumbers on a cutting board.
    Step 7: Seed and chop cucumbers.
    Whisking golden colored vinaigrette in a glass measuring cup.
    Step 8: Whisk or shake the vinaigrette together.
    A close up of tabouli salad in a white bowl.
    Step 9: Gently mix everything together in a large bowl. Toss with a little dressing and serve additional dressing on the side.

    How to Dice Tomatoes Perfectly

    If you want nice diced tomatoes, follow my photos. It's good practice and knife work. Why do this? It keeps the tabouli drier and fluffy versus getting soggy from extra tomato juice. Same for the cucumbers.

    Four steps for how to dice tomatoes, on a walnut cutting board.
    1. First slice a little bit off the top.
    2. Slice them in half lengthwise, then in half again for quarters
    3. Holding the knife parallel to the cutting board, slice out the juicy seedy centers.
    4. Cut each quarter into long thin slices.
    5. Chop each piece into a nice dice.

    Cut the cucumbers the same way. Quarter them, slice out the center seedy part, slice into long pieces, the chop into a nice small dice.

    Serving Suggestions

    Tabouli is nice at room temperature or chilled. Serve it alone or with grilled meat or chicken, fish or shellfish, like these grilled scallops (with or without the prosciutto). This grilled lemon chicken breast recipe is perfect with tabouli and compliments the lemon flavor.

    Save leftover tabouli in an airtight container. It keeps 3-4 days in the refrigerator.

    Recipe FAQs

    What are some tips for making the best tabouli?

    To make the best tabouli wash and dry your herbs well, them chop them fine. Use either a sharp chef's knife and chop by hand or drop dry herbs through the feed tube of a running food processor. Dice tomatoes small and onion fine, either red or green onions. Choose either fine bulgur for a traditional tabouli or use quinoa for a twist and make it gluten-free. Dress with a simple lemon and olive oil vinaigrette just before or at serving.

    Is tabouli a complete meal or a side dish?

    Tabouli is generally a side dish, but you can make it a complete meal. Add cooked garbanzo beans for a vegan tabouli or top with sliced or diced chicken, fish or shellfish such as grilled shrimp. Adding feta cheese and pine nuts also adds protein if that is your goal.

    Can I substitute quinoa for bulgur in tabouli?

    Yes, quinoa is a terrific substitution for bulgur in tabouli. If you don't eat wheat, quinoa is gluten-free, plus it's light a fluffy

    More Terrific Salad Recipes

    If you need more salad ideas, from leafy green salads to vegetable salads or this Mediterranean potato salad, check out the salad recipes category page for more inspiration.

    • greek salad
      Tossed Greek Green Salad
    • leafy green and berry salad
      Strawberry Goat Cheese Salad
    • A white bowl of lentil quinoa salad with basil leaves and a serving spoon.
      Lentil Quinoa Salad with Lemon Vinaigrette

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A close up of tabouli salad with tomatoes and green onion in a white bowl.

    Tabouli Salad (tabbouleh)

    Sally Cameron
    Fluffy, crunchy, healthy and refreshing, serve tabouli chilled or room temperature. It's great for lunch or dinner in the heat of summer. Serve with chicken, meat, fish, or by itself as a vegetarian dish. Make this salad a day, even two days, ahead of serving. It will keep for 2-3 days undressed in the refrigerator. Dress before serving. See variation ideas at the end.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 18 minutes mins
    Assembly time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 33 minutes mins
    Course lunch, Salad
    Cuisine Mediterranean
    Servings 6
    Calories 215 kcal

    Equipment

    • salad spinner
    • Chef's knife

    Ingredients
      

    Quinoa Tabouleh Salad

    • ¾ cup quinoa white or tri-color blend
    • 2 Persian cucumbers diced small sub half a large English seedless
    • 2 roma tomatoes chopped small
    • 2 large bunches parsley curly or flat leaf
    • 1 small bunch mint leaves
    • ¼ red onion chopped fine
    • 3 green onions or scallions chopped fine

    Lemon Vinaigrette

    • 6 tablespoons olive oil
    • 3 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
    • 1 large garlic clove very finely chopped or zested with a microplane
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Instructions
     

    Rinse and Cook Quinoa

    • Wash raw quinoa well under cold running water with a sprayer attachment through a sieve or soak and stir in a bowl of cold water, drain and wash again.
    • Cook quinoa. I use a 2 quart pan and 1 ½ cups water. Bring water to a boil, add quinoa. Reduce to a simmer and cover with lid. Turn heat to low. Cook until all water is absorbed, about 15 minutes. Turn off heat. Allow to stand for 10 minutes to steam finish. The grains should be light and fluffy with the germ ring unfurled. Spread quinoa on a rimmed baking sheet and allow to cool.

    Make the Vinaigrette and Prep the Vegetables

    • While quinoa is cooking, make the vinaigrette, then prep the vegetables and herbs. To make the vinaigrette, whisk all ingredients together in a small bowl. This recipe makes extra, in case you need a bit more. For cucumbers, quarter them, slice out the seedy center, cut each quarter into long strips and cut across into fine dice. Do the same with the tomatoes.
      See photos in the post for help.

    Mix and Dress the Salad

    • Add the cucumber, tomatoes, onion, and herbs to the cooled quinoa. When ready to serve add a few tablespoons of the dressing and toss gently. Add enough to flavor the salad but don't soak it in dressing. Serve chilled with extra dressing on the side.

    Notes

    To chop fresh herbs, wash and dry well. Dry herbs chop easily. Chopping wet or damp herbs just becomes a mess. Wash and dry on paper towels or in a salad spinner, then air dry until completely dry on a kitchen towel.
    Variations:
    • Crumbled or cubed feta cheese (or goat cheese) is a nice addition.
    • Want more color? Use red and yellow tomatoes.
    • For a lighter color salad, use all white quinoa.
    • Want a little more texture and protein? Add canned rinsed and drained chickpeas (aka garbanzos).
    • Add pine nuts for a buttery crunch.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 215kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 4gFat: 15gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gSodium: 101mgPotassium: 233mgFiber: 2gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 291IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 23mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Cut Watermelon Tutorial (3 ways)

    08/04/2023 by Sally Cameron 8 Comments

    A white platter of watermelon slices and a bowl of cubes.

    Fresh watermelon is the perfect hot summer day summer refresher since they are more than 90% water. The challenge is they are heavy, round, and awkward to cut, unless you know how. Let me show you how to cut watermelon step-by-step for watermelon cubes, triangle-shaped slices, and watermelon sticks while summer watermelon is still plentiful.

    A bowl of red watermelon cubes and a platter of slices.

    The best way to cut a watermelon requires a big sharp chef's knife to get through the hard rind and a large sturdy cutting board. A couple of tips make it easy and it's good knife skills practice. Don't let it daunt you. Try these 3 different ways at cutting watermelon and become a pro.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Tutorial

    • Buy a whole watermelon and cut it whenever you want to enjoy it.
    • Learn the best way on how to cut watermelon into watermelon cubes of any size for snacking, adding to a salad, triangle wedges for a fruit platter, or into watermelon sticks.
    • Cutting your own watermelon is freshest and you get exactly what you want.

    If you love watermelon, try this watermelon appetizer with goat cheese for a refreshing summer bite.

    Recipe Ingredients

    It's not a recipe, but an easy method. I prefer the mini seedless watermelons. They are usually in the 5-6 pound range. You can use the same method for cutting up whole watermelon of any size or even half watermelons cut by the market's produce department.

    If you need help on how to pick a good watermelon, find tips towards the end of the post.

    Recipe Instructions

    How to cut watermelon. Start by placing a damp kitchen towel under your cutting board to prevent it from slipping and give it stability. Use a chef's knife or a long serrated slicer like this knife, or some people get an inexpensive watermelon knife.

    A mini seedless watermelon on a cutting board.
    Step 1: Slice a thin piece off one end of the watermelon.
    Red seedless watermelon cut on half on a black cutting board.
    Step 2: Stand the watermelon on the flat surface for stability and cut it in half from top to bottom into two equal halves. Now decide whether you want watermelon cubes, slices, or sticks.

    How to Cut a Watermelon Into Cubes

    Big slices of red watermelon on a black cutting board with knife.
    Step 1: Cut long, 1-inch slices top to bottom from a half.
    Cutting watermelon slices into cubes.
    Step 2: Trim the rind from the slices, then cut watermelon into a grid pattern for .

    Cutting Watermelon Slices or Wedges

    Showing how to cut watermelon slices from a quarter melon.
    Step 1: Cut the watermelon halves in half again (into quarters) lengthwise, then slice crosswise into triangles or wedges.

    How to Cut Watermelon Sticks

    Cutting a watermelon half crosswise into 1-inch slices.
    Step 1: Cut watermelon in half, lay the on the flat side and cut i-inch wide slices.
    Cutting watermelon sticks from half a watermelon.
    Step 2: Turn the sliced half and cut each slice into sticks. See note below.
    Red watermelon sticks on a black cutting board.
    Step 3: Cut watermelon sticks in the entire half.
    A white bowl of red watermelon sticks ready to serve.
    Step 4: Invert into a serving bowl. The rind serves as handles.

    Chef's note on cutting watermelon sticks. After cutting the half melon into 1-inch slices, turn the melon and cut the other direction. If it starts to fall apart, lay pieces flat and cut watermelon individually into sticks. That makes it easy. Reassemble if desired.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Cut watermelon wedges or triangles for a party platter or fruit salads.
    • Use a melon baller to cut round watermelon balls for delicious fresh fruit kabobs (photo below). Toss extra melon into the blender for melon water.
    • Make a watermelon salad with feta and herbs. It's a refreshing and healthy combination.
    • Add to a watermelon to a tossed green salad.
    • Use a large cookie cutter for a prettier look on platters or salads.
    • Add frozen watermelon cubes to smoothies.
    • Puree in the blender, add lime juice, and you have Mexican watermelon water.
    • Make watermelon cucumber juice.
    • Perfect for a summer backyard barbecue and kid-friendly.
    • Freeze cubes (or extra watermelon) and blend for a watermelon slushie.

    For reference, watermelons are about 70% flesh and 30% rind. A 5 pound mini watermelon serves approximately 8 people. Find great information on watermelons from this website.

    Fruit kabobs with watermelon, cantaloupe, and honeydew melons.

    How to Pick a Good Watermelon

    What's the best method to choose a ripe juicy watermelon? Try these tips.

    • Shape: choose a firm watermelon with a regular, symmetrical shape, not misshapen or narrow at one end.
    • Choose one free of bruises, dents, or cuts. Minor scratches are normal.
    • Field ground spot: Overall rind color is not a very good indicator. Look for a creamy yellow to orange "field spot". This is where the melon sat on the ground as it grew soaking up the sun. Creamy yellow to orange means it grew longer and should be more ripe and sweet. Avoid melons that have no spot or where it's white or pale green. They are probably not as ripe or sweet and don't ripen more after harvesting.
    • Watermelon rind should be dull.
    • A watermelon should be heavy for its size, meaning it's juicy; they are mostly water. Pick up a few to compare and choose the heaviest one.
    • Tap or thump: If you are used to thumping as one of the indicators of a good watermelon, it should have a deep, hollow sound sound.

    My favorite watermelons are seedless mini watermelons. They are easier to handle because of the small size. The rinds are usually thinner too, so easier to cut than a large watermelon.

    How to Store Watermelon

    Eat watermelon soon as possible for best flavor.

    • Wash watermelon with produce wash as soon as you get it home, then store in the refrigerator. Whole watermelon lasts about 2 weeks in the refrigerator uncut.
    • If you are enjoying watermelon within a day or two, it's fine on the kitchen counter at room temperature. Beyond that, refrigerate until you're ready to cut.
    • Refrigerate watermelon after cutting. It lasts 3-4 days in an airtight container. Wrap the cut side of larger pieces (like quarters or halves) in plastic wrap.
    • If you buy cut watermelon at the market, be sure it is fresh cut. Look for a date sticker or ask a produce person.

    Recipe FAQs

    Does watermelon have a low glycemic load?

    If you are concerned about watermelon being high in sugar, consider this. If you look at the glycemic index (GI) of watermelon, it's listed high with a 76-80 score, meaning high sugar (1-100 scale). If you look at the glycemic load (GL) which is a 1-10 scale, it's only listed as 5.

    Glycemic load gives you a more accurate picture of a food's (in this case the GL of watermelon) real-life impact on your blood sugar. Watermelon can be a sweet as well as nutritious part of your summer diet.

    What is the easiest way to cut up a watermelon?

    First slice a thin piece off of one end of the watermelon. This gives you stability for the rest of your cutting. Stand the watermelon on the flat end, then slice in half top to bottom. Now you have halves to slice into wedges, cubes, or sticks. A mini watermelon is easier to handle and cut the the full size ones.

    How long can you keep sliced watermelon in the fridge?

    Cut watermelon keeps 3-4 days well wrapped with plastic film if it's in halves or quarters. For wedges and cubes, store in an airtight container.

    Can you eat watermelon seeds?

    Yes, you can eat watermelon seeds. They are safe to eat and really nutritious. Black watermelon seeds are mature seeds. Plant them they will grow. The white seeds in seedless watermelons are immature seeds or pips. You can even roast the black seeds and snack on them, like you do with pumpkin seeds.

    Are seedless watermelons natural?

    Yes, seedless watermelons are natural. They are grown by cross-breeding kinds of watermelons and not by genetic modification. Seedless watermelons are non-GMO. And if you buy organic, it can't be bio-engineered.

    More Summer Recipes Ideas

    Try these summer recipes while seasonal produce is abundant.

    • tomato gazpacho soup
      Gazpacho Andaluz (Spanish Chilled Tomato Soup
    • Bowl of bright tropical colored pineapple mango salsa.
      Fresh Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe
    • Grilled zucchini in a grill basket right off the barbecue.
      Quick and Simple Grilled Zucchini
    • Zucchini Casserole with Parmesan Crumb Topping
      Zucchini Gratin with Parmesan Crust

    ⭐️Did You Use This Tutorial?

    Let me know if this helped you by adding a comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A white platter of watermelon slices and a bowl of cubes.

    How to Cut Watermelon

    Sally Cameron
    How to Cut Watermelon (3 ways)
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 85 kcal

    Equipment

    • large knife
    • Cutting board

    Ingredients
      

    • 5 pound seedless watermelon heavy for it's size or any size watermelon

    Instructions
     

    For watermelon wedges, triangles, or slices

    • First trim one end of the watermelon.
      Stand the watermelon on the flat end and cut in half top to bottom.
      Lay the halves flat on the cutting board and cut in half lengthwise for quarters.
      Cut wedges crosswise on the quarters.

    For watermelon cubes

    • First trim one end of the watermelon.
      Stand the watermelon on the flat end and cut in half top to bottom.
      Cut the halves into 1-inch wide slices. Lay slices flat and trim off the rind. Then cut the flesh into a grid pattern and cubes of desired size. The tighter the grid, the smaller the pieces.

    For watermelon sticks

    • Cut the watermelon in half across the center. Lay the half flat, flesh side down on the cutting board. Cut a 1-inch grid across the watermelon, then turn and cut the same grid the opposite direction. To serve, place the half flat on a platter or invert into a serving bowl. The green rind is the handle.

    Notes

    • Wash watermelon with produce wash as soon as you get it home, then store in the refrigerator. Whole watermelon lasts about 2 weeks in the refrigerator uncut.
    • If you are enjoying watermelon within a day or two, it's fine on the kitchen counter at room temperature. Beyond that, refrigerate until you're ready to cut.
    • Refrigerate watermelon after cutting. It lasts 3-4 days in an airtight container. Wrap the cut side of larger pieces (like quarters or halves) in plastic wrap.
    • If you buy cut watermelon at the market, be sure it is fresh cut. Look for a date sticker or ask a produce person.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 85kcalCarbohydrates: 21gProtein: 2gFat: 0.4gSaturated Fat: 0.04gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gSodium: 3mgPotassium: 318mgFiber: 1gSugar: 18gVitamin A: 1613IUVitamin C: 23mgCalcium: 20mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Goat Cheese Crostini With Baked Nectarines

    08/31/2012 by Sally Cameron 6 Comments

    Nectarine and goat cheese crostini.

    Nectarines are my favorite of the stone fruit family. Ever roast them? Roasting brings out their sweetness and concentrates their flavor. Here's an easy, sure to please appetizer: goat cheese crostini with baked nectarines. Trust me. You'll love these if you are a nectarine and goat cheese fan.

    Roasted nectarines on crostini with goat cheese on a blue plate.

    We have good friends who eat with us frequently. They work here during the week, then drive home a few hours up the coast for the weekends. I can't let them eat restaurant food every night, so they often join us for dinner. They bring great wine, I cook dinner, we catch up on life, and it's always a great evening. What could be better?

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • An easy appetizer that's a little different.
    • A terrific end-of-summer appetizer that makes the best of beautiful nectarines in a new way.

    Recipe Ingredients

    For the crostini

    • ▢3 tablespoons olive oil
    • ▢3 tablespoons butter melted
    • ▢1 teaspoon granulated garlic
    • ▢½ long baguette preferably whole wheat or multi-grain

    For the roasted nectarines

    • Nectarines: Get just ripe ones with a little give when you gently press on them.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil
    • Cheese: Goat cheese log or in a spreadable tub.
    • Nuts: For garnishing, chopped pistachios or walnuts.
    • Herbs: A sprinkle of fresh chopped thyme leaves is nice for color and flavor.
    • Optional garnish: A drizzle of balsamic glaze adds sweet-tart richness and color.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Instead of goat cheese try pureed cottage cheese, whipped feta, ricotta cheese, or cream cheese.
    • Substitute chopped fresh parsley for the thyme leaves or skip it.

    Recipe Instructions

    Halve and pit nectarines, then drizzle with a little olive oil and a sprinkle of salt. Just a few minutes in a hot oven and the nectarines are soft and luscious. When they are cool enough to handle, cut each half in quarters or thinner depending on their size.

    Sprinkling halved and pitted nectarines with salt in a casserole dish for baking.
    Deep rich red nectarines halved in a baking dish for roasting.

    How to Make Crostini

    Slicing a baguette crosswise into crostini for appetizers.

    To make crostini, thinly slice a baguette on the diagonal. Brush with an olive oil-butter-granulated garlic blend and bake in a 350°F oven for a few minutes to crisp. While the crostini are baking, get the nectarines ready to roast.

    To make it easier, use a small serrated knife (called a tomato knife and great for slicing tomatoes too) like this, or a larger serrated bread knife.

    My Olive Oil-Butter-Garlic Blend

    That olive oil garlic blend is something I created decades ago and use for just about everything. Make crostini, spread on toasted for beneath poached eggs, make garlic toast, drizzle like a sauce. There's always a little pot in my fridge, waiting to be meted and used again.

    Simply combine equal amounts or melted unsalted butter, olive oil and a little granulated or powdered garlic and stir. I don't have exact measurements.

    Serving Suggestions

    Spread crisp crostini with a little soft goat cheese, a nectarine piece, and sprinkle with chopped pistachios and a little fresh thyme.

    For over the top taste, drizzle with homemade balsamic glaze or good quality balsamic vinegar. Making your own balsamic glaze is really easy and better than the store bought versions.

    Any extra roast nectarines are nice in a salad or added to breakfast oatmeal, yogurt, or over ice cream. Use them in a Greek yogurt parfait.

    A tray of the finished crostini topped with roasted nectarines, goat cheese, and balsamic glaze.

    Looking for More Super Appetizer Recipes?

    Whether it's a French mushroom spread, creamy hummus, cool watermelon, or a simple garden dip for veggies, try this for your get-togethers.

    • Closeup of mushroom pate in a white ramekin with a spoon.
      Classic French Mushroom Duxelle
    • A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.
      Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe
    • watermelon goat cheese appetizers
      Summer Watermelon Goat Cheese Appetizer
    • Easy Green Goddess Dip (and dressing)

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please comment, and let me know, I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    nectarine goat cheese crostini | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Goat Cheese Crostini With Baked Nectarines

    Sally Cameron
    Roasting nectarines with olive oil and a sprinkle of salt makes them soft and luscious, perfect for topping crisp crostini spread with goat cheese for a summer appetizer. I keep a little jar of the butter-olive oil-garlic mix in the fridge at all times for lot of uses.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 22 minutes mins
    Assemble 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 32 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 202 kcal

    Equipment

    • Rimmed baking sheet for crostini
    • Casserole to roast nectarines

    Ingredients
      

    For the crostini

    • 3 tablespoons olive oil
    • 3 tablespoons butter melted
    • 1 teaspoon granulated garlic
    • ½ long baguette preferably whole wheat or multi-grain

    For the roast nectarines

    • 3 large nectarines
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • ⅛ teaspoon sea or kosher salt
    • 6 ounces goat cheese room temperature
    • 1-2 tablespoons chopped pistachios or walnuts
    • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh thyme leaves optional

    Optional Garnish

    • Balsamic vinegar glaze optional, see notes below

    Instructions
     

    Bake the Crostini

    • Pre-heat the oven to 350 degrees.Cover a rimmed baking sheet with parchment or foil for easier clean-up. Mix the olive oil, melted butter and granulated garlic together and stir. Slice the baguette diagonally about ¼″ thick. Place the slices on the baking sheet and brush lightly with the olive oil mixture. Bake crostini approximately 8-10 minutes, or until the edges are golden. They will crisp more as they cool.

    Roast the Nectarines

    • Turn the oven up to 400 degrees. Halve the nectarines and remove the pit. Place them cut side down in a small casserole or Pyrex dish. Drizzle with the olive oil and sprinkle with salt. Turn them over to coat, leaving them cut side down. Bake uncovered for approximately 10-12 minutes, or until they can be pierced with the tip of a paring knife. Remove from the oven and cool until they can be handled. Slice each half into four pieces or thinner if desired.

    Assemble the Appetizer

    • Spread crostini with a little soft goat cheese, top with a piece of roasted nectarine and a sprinkle of chopped pistachios. At serving, drizzle with a little Balsamic and sprinkle with fresh thyme leaves.

    Notes

    Homemade balsamic glaze is easy to make, but it can be purchased. Find it near vinegar at the store (but the homemade is better!)
    How many slices of bread you get out of your baguette depends on the length of the bread. For a long baguette, fully sliced yields about 20 slices.
    As this recipe uses ½ of a baguette, either slice them all and freeze the ones you don't use, or bake them all and use with eggs, salads, soups, etc. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 202kcalCarbohydrates: 9gProtein: 7gFat: 16gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gCholesterol: 14mgSodium: 172mgPotassium: 146mgFiber: 2gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 625IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 57mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Fig Salad with Goat Cheese and Balsamic Vinaigrette

    09/18/2012 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    grilled fig salad

    Sweet, juicy figs meet creamy goat cheese and a tangy balsamic vinaigrette in this fresh fig salad that's full of flavor and texture. With their deep purple skin and tender pink centers, ripe figs add a burst of sweetness that feels just right for summer. For even more flavor, brush them with olive oil and give them a quick sear on a hot grill or grill pan to bring out their caramelized edges.

    Fig salad with grilled figs, salad greens, goat cheese, and balsamic dressing.

    Figs have been cherished since ancient times-not just for their beauty, but for their nutrition. These little pear-shaped gems are naturally rich in fiber, vitamins, and minerals. While figs are wonderful eaten just as they are, a quick turn in a hot grill pan concentrates their sweetness and softens their texture, making them even more luscious and flavorful.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Salad

    • Seasonal treat - A great way to use fresh figs while they're in season.
    • Flavorful twist - Fresh figs are a nice change from the usual fruit in salads.
    • Flexible - Can't find fresh figs? Use dried.
    • Nutrient-rich - Figs are naturally high in fiber, vitamins, and minerals.

    For another recipe using figs, try this easy crostini appetizer.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Fig Salad

    • Figs: The star of the salad, get what look best at the grocery store, and not too soft.
    • Salad greens: Use your favorite soft lettuce such as red lettuce or peppery arugula. A spring blend is nice too.
    • Nuts: Chopped raw walnuts, toast for more flavor.
    • Cheese: A mild creamy goat cheese adds nice texture and flavor.

    Honey balsamic vinaigrette

    • Oil: Use a good extra virgin olive oil.
    • Vinegar: For this it must be balsamic! Here's the balsamic vinegar I use.
    • Honey: For just a little sweetness. Make the vinaigrette without it and add if needed. It depends on the balsamic you are using.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Chef's tip on buying figs: Figs are fragile things, so plan to use them within a day or two of purchase. I buy them just barely squeezable to the touch, not too soft, with smooth skin, then refrigerate until I plan to use them. Let them warm up before adding to the salad for more flavor than when cold.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Change up the cheese selction and try tangy Greek feta, blue cheese, or Gorgonzola cheese work well.
    • For vegan diners or non-dairy, try a vegan cheese.
    A plate of beautiful purple figs with a purple napkin under the plate on wood table.

    Recipe Instructions

    When ready to make your salad, trim off the figs stem, cut them in half vertically, and brush with a little olive oil. Heat a grill pan over medium high heat and coat the grill pan with a little non-stick spray. Grill the figs, cut side down for 1-2 minutes. Remove them to a plate while you assemble your salad.

    For the balsamic vinaigrette, whisk ingredients together in a bowl or make a large batch to use for the wekk in the blend. You can also shake in a jar with a tight lid.

    Chef's Tip on figs: Different fig varieties bring their own personality to the plate. Black Mission figs are the most common-deep purple-black skin with rich, jammy sweetness. Brown Turkey figs are milder and less sweet, with a slightly earthier flavor and lighter brown-purple skin. Adriatic figs (often green with pink interiors) are very sweet and delicate, perfect for contrast in salads. Kadota figs are light green to yellow with a less sugary, more subtle flavor. All are delicious-choose what's ripe and available!

    Two black mission fresh
 figs on an old wooden cutting board, salad behind.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Add a protein: Top with grilled chicken, seared steak, prosciutto, or even sliced roasted duck for a dinner-worthy salad.
    • Serve alongside: It pairs beautifully with a cheese and charcuterie board, crusty gluten-free bread, or a bowl of creamy soup.
    • Pack it for lunch: Keep dressing separate and toss when ready to eat-add nuts for crunch and staying power.

    Recipe FAQs

    What type of figs should I use?

    Fresh figs are best, such as Black Mission, Brown Turkey, or Kadota. Dried figs can be used if fresh ones aren't available.

    What dressing works best for a fig salad?

    A balsamic vinaigrette is classic, but honey mustard or a citrus vinaigrette also pair beautifully.

    What can I substitute for figs?

    If figs aren't available, try fresh pears, fresh or dried apricots, or even dried figs for a similar flavor profile.

    Should I grill the figs?

    Grilling or roasting figs enhances their sweetness and adds a smoky depth, but it's optional. Use a grill pan or for a crowd on a outdoor grill, use a grill basket. Another option is broiling them cut side up dusted with a little sugar to caramelize them, but watch they don't burn.

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this fig salad, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    fig salad | Afoodcentriclife.com

    Fig Salad with Balsamic Vinaigrette

    Sally Cameron
    Fresh figs have a unique texture and flavor. Brush them with olive oil and briefly grill in a grill pan to being out their luscious qualities. They make a fabulous, healthy addition to a tossed green salad. Add "goodies" as you please and dress lightly with a honey-Balsamic vinaigrette.  
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Salad
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 284 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Salad

    • 6-8 fresh figs
    • olive oil as needed
    • 5 ounces organic baby arugula
    • ¼ cup chopped raw walnuts
    • 4 ounces Blue or Gorgonzola cheese optional

    Honey Balsamic Vinaigrette

    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon Balsamic vinegar
    • 2 teaspoons honey
    • 2 pinches sea salt
    • 2 pinches ground black pepper

    Instructions
     

    • Heat a grill pan or grill over medium-high heat until hot. Spray with a little non-stick spray or brush with a tiny bit canola oil. Trim the stems off the figs and cut them in half vertically. Brush the cut surface with a little olive oil. Alternatively, place the oil on a small plate and dip the figs in it. Place the figs cut side down on the hot grill pan. Grill for 1-2 minutes, until grill marks appear and the surface is golden or browned. Remove figs to a clean plate or piece of waxed paper.
    • Make the vinaigrette by whisking the ingredients together in a small bowl. Place salad greens on plates, add the nuts, cranberries and cheese (if using), add your grilled figs, and drizzle with a little of the vinaigrette. Alternatively, place about half of the vinaigrette in a medium bowl, add the greens and toss to coat with your clean hands. You'll use less dressing this way. Then add your "goodies" as desired. Serve and enjoy!

    Notes

    Different fig varieties bring their own personality to the plate. Black Mission figs are the most common-deep purple-black skin with rich, jammy sweetness. Brown Turkey figs are milder and less sweet, with a slightly earthier flavor and lighter brown-purple skin. Adriatic figs (often green with pink interiors) are very sweet and delicate, perfect for contrast in salads. Kadota figs are light green to yellow with a less sugary, more subtle flavor. All are delicious-choose what's ripe and available!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 284kcalCarbohydrates: 20gProtein: 9gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gCholesterol: 21mgSodium: 601mgPotassium: 422mgFiber: 3gSugar: 15gVitamin A: 1168IUVitamin C: 7mgCalcium: 243mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make Mexican Watermelon Water

    07/07/2023 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A glass of bright red watermelon agua fresca with mint and ice.

    Cool, crisp, and naturally hydrating-this homemade watermelon water is the ultimate summer refreshment. Made in minutes with just a blender, it's a simple, sugar-free drink that tastes like summer in a glass. Perfect for hot days, backyard barbecues, picnics, and poolside sipping, it's a clean, delicious alternative to soda, sweetened iced tea, or sports drinks.

    Beautiful bright red watermelon water with mint and lime in a clear glass.

    Watermelon water has other names too, like watermelon juice. Since it's hails from Mexican cuisine, it's also called agua de sandia or watermelon agua fresca. Simply a refreshing drink of pureed watermelon with lime juice, water if desired, and optionally a little sweetener. Most of the time it's not needed.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Watermelon Water

    • Naturally hydrating and refreshing-a clean, healthy drink for hot days.
    • Quick and easy to make with just a blender-no juicer needed.
    • Perfect for summertime when watermelon is sweet, juicy, and in season.
    • Love WTRMLN WTR or Mela Water? Make your own at home and save money.

    If you love summer melons, make these tasty little melon kabobs for snacks or a healthy dessert or these popular watermelon and goat cheese appetizers.

    What You'll Need

    Red mini watermelon and limes for making watermelon water juice.
    • Watermelon - Choose a ripe, red, seedless watermelon-often sold as a "mini watermelon." Look for tips below on how to pick a good one.
    • Sweetener (optional) - Most of the time, no sweetener is needed-a ripe watermelon is naturally sweet. Taste the juice first. If you'd like a little extra sweetness, try a touch of sugar, granular monk fruit, or a monk fruit-based simple syrup for a natural, no-sugar option.
    • Lime - Fresh lime juice adds brightness and balances the sweetness. Add to taste-start with a little and adjust.
    • Water (optional) - For a lighter drink, add still or sparkling water. Use filtered water if possible for the cleanest taste.

    Please see the recipe card for quantities.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • No limes? Use lemon juice instead-it turns into a refreshing watermelon lemonade.
    • Make it a cocktail. Add a splash of white tequila, vodka, or white rum for an easy summer sip.
    • Want a slushie? Briefly freeze the watermelon cubes, then blend for a frosty twist.
    • Strain or don't. Strain the blended mixture for a smoother, juice-like texture-or skip it for a rustic, fiber-rich drink.

    Chef's Tip: How to buy a good watermelon? 1) The melon should feel heavy for it's size meaning it's juicy watermelon with a high water content 2) Look for a creamy yellow to orange field spot. It's where the melon sat on the ground soaking up the sun. Creamy yellow to orange means it grew longer and should be more ripe and sweet. 3) Choose one free of bruises or scars. Minor scratches are ok, and look for a uniform shape. And what about tapping or thumping? Some swear by thumping or tapping watermelon, but it's not always consistent. If you do thump it, it should have a deep sound (versus hollow) when tapped or thumped. Here's a good article on buying watermelons.

    How to Make Watermelon Water

    Cutting up a red watermelon into chunks on a black cutting board.
    Step 1: Chop the watermelon into chunks
    Top down view of bright red watermelon cubes in a blender.
    Step 2: Place cubes in the blender.
    Pureed watermelon in a blender for making juice.
    Step 3: Puree the watermelon.
    Watermelon pulp in a stainless steel strainer with a ladle.
    Step 4: Strain the watermelon puree (optional).
    A glass of bright red watermelon agua fresca with mint and ice.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Serve chilled or over ice in a glass.
    • Add lime wedges on the side so guests can adjust the tartness to taste.
    • Garnish with fresh mint or a small wedge of watermelon for a pretty, summery touch (optional, but lovely).

    🍧 Bonus Idea: Watermelon Popsicles

    Pour the blended watermelon water into popsicle molds and freeze. They're light, hydrating, and perfect for hot summer days!

    If you have an electric juicer, try this watermelon cucumber juice recipe.

    A glass of beautiful red watermelon agua fresca with a lime slice for garnish on a basket tray.

    How to Cut Up a Watermelon

    Read this post with helpful photographs on how to cut up a watermelon.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is watermelon water good for you?

    Watermelon water is a refreshing summer drink providing vitamins A, C and B6, the amino acid citrulline, plus natural electrolytes potassium and magnesium, important for muscle and nerve function. Possibly the best benefit of watermelon is a phytonutrient called lycopene. As an antioxidant, lycopene provides heart health bone health, and anti-inflammatory benefits in that beautiful red color and is linked to a reduced risk for cancer and age-related eye disorders.

    What is watermelon water?

    Watermelon water is basically what are called an aguas frescas or fresh waters in Spanish. It's traditional in Mexican cuisine and made with many fresh fruits. It's super refreshing. With fresh, ripe, seasonal fruit it's not needed. In some areas you'll see them sold by street vendors from carts.

    Why is watermelon so hydrating?

    Like cucumbers and other melons, watermelons are more than 90% water. Plus the natural minerals and sugar watermelon provides support hydration, perfect for a hot summer day. For more health benefits of watermelon here's a good article. Watermelon water can help with hydration.

    Are there any specific brands of watermelon water that are recommended?

    When your away from home and can't make it yourself, the brand wtrmln wtr has no additives. When home, homemade beats brands and it is so easy to make! When you make watermelon water at home, there are no artificial flavors, artificial colors, or added sugar often in grocery store watermelon water.

    More Terrific Summer Refresher Recipes

    To help you beat the summer heat, here are a few ideas for more delicious, refreshing summer recipes. Try the cold gazpacho if you've never made it!

    • tomato gazpacho soup
      Gazpacho Andaluz (Spanish Chilled Tomato Soup
    • Creamy light green cucumber mint smoothie in a glass with lime slice.
      Refreshing Cucumber Smoothie Recipe
    • virgin margarita
      Mango Mocktail Margarita (no alcohol)
    • Green Juice with Cabbage and Celery

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make watermelon water, please add your comment. I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A glass of bright red watermelon agua fresca with mint and ice.

    How to Make Watermelon Water

    Sally Cameron
    Watermelon juice mixed with lime and sparkling or still water makes a refreshing way to beat summer heat. Float a few lime slices in it for garnish with some fresh mint. Super hydrating and delicious. No added sugar or sweetening needed.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Juices
    Cuisine American, Mexican
    Servings 6 Yield 48 ounces
    Calories 73 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender
    • Fine sieve

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 pounds seedless watermelon cubes from a 5 pound mini watermelon
    • ¼-1/2 cup fresh squeezed lime juice 5-6 limes
    • ½-1 cup filtered water still or sparking, optional

    Instructions
     

    • If starting with a whole watermelon versus already chopped cubes, wash watermelon rind well. Slice a little off one end and stand the watermelon on the flat end and cut in half. Lay the halves flat and cut into slices. Remove the rind. Puree in a blender. Strain and discard pulp for a smoother drink or leave it in. Add lime juice. Add still or sparkling water if desired. Garnish with mint and lime slices.

    Notes

    How to buy a good watermelon:
    • The melon should feel heavy for it's size meaning it's juicy watermelon with a high water content
    • Look for a creamy yellow to orange field spot. It's where the melon sat on the ground soaking up the sun. Creamy yellow to orange means it grew longer and should be more ripe and sweet.
    • Choose one free of bruises or scars. Minor scratches are ok
    • Look for a uniform shape.
    • And what about tapping or thumping? Some swear by the thumping method, but it's not always consistent. If you do thump it, it should have a deep sound (versus hollow).
    If you need help on how cut up a watermelon, read this post with helpful photographs.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 8ounceCalories: 73kcalCarbohydrates: 19gProtein: 1gFat: 0.4gSaturated Fat: 0.04gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gSodium: 3mgPotassium: 278mgFiber: 1gSugar: 14gVitamin A: 1301IUVitamin C: 24mgCalcium: 19mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Fresh Vegetable Spring Rolls with Peanut Sauce

    07/30/2013 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    rainbow spring rolls

    Whether you call them vegetable spring rolls or summer rolls, these fresh little vegetable-filled rice paper wraps are perfect for hot summer days. Make them as appetizers, for snacking, or as a side dish to grilled seafood, chicken or meat. It's a fun way to get more fresh vegetables into your diet. Let me show you how, step-by-step.

    vegetable spring rolls

    These vegetable spring rolls are fresh, cool, and brightly colored from all of the crunchy raw veggies and herbs. Serve them with a creamy delicious peanut butter dipping sauce you'll really enjoy.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • They work as a snack, appetizer, or side.
    • The fresh raw veggie filling makes them light and crunchy.
    • They're fun to make.

    For another fresh cool summer appetizer, try these colorful summer fruit kabobs made with melon balls.

    Recipe Ingredients

    vegetables

    Vegetable Spring Rolls

    • Rice paper wrappers: Either brown rice or white rice. Find them on the Asian asile of your market or in an Asian market.
    • Fresh vegetables: Zucchini, carrots, red or yellow bell pepper.
    • Sprouts: Use either sprouts or microgreens.
    • Cabbage: Adds nice color and crunch.
    • Fresh herbs: Use mint, basil, or cilantro
    • Lettuce: Red lettuce or a green leaf lettuce has good color and is soft for rolling.

    Dipping Sauce

    • Hoisin sauce: Look for no high fructose corn syrup brand or do as I do and make homemade hoisin sauce.
    • Lime: Fresh lime juice gives the dipping sauce a nice tang and brightness..
    • Soy sauce: Use either tamari (gluten-free soy sauce), or soy sauce. Read labels and be sure to buy low sodium.
    • Ginger: Use either fresh, peeled ginger grated very fine, or the ginger puree in tubes or jars.
    • Peanut butter: Use creamy peanut butter and read the labels for no junk added.
    • Vinegar: Unseasoned rice vinegar or champagne vinegar.
    • Garlic: Use fresh or buy the puree in a tube (in the produce department).

    Chef's tip: To achieve very fine ginger for dressing, sauces, and other recipes, use an inexpensive microplane zester or a handy tool like this ginger grater. They work with garlic too.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Many traditional recipes add small shrimp and rice vermicelli (bean thread) noodles. You can add small bites of whatever meat or seafood you like to vary the flavors, or keep them vegan.
    • For protein that's vegan, use tofu.
    • Swap the peanut butter for creamy almond butter, cashew butter.
    • For nut allergies, use creamy sunflower butter or tahini.
    • If available, layer in thin asparagus spears, raw or blanched.

    Spring Rolls vs. Summer Rolls

    Are these spring rolls or summer rolls? What's the difference? Commonly, even if incorrect, this recipe is actually summer rolls not spring rolls, but they are usually lumped into the same category. Generally speaking, here are a few differences between the two:

    • Spring rolls hail from Chinese cuisine and summer rolls from Vietnamese cuisine.
    • Spring rolls are usually fried (sometimes baked), while summer rolls are fresh and not fried.
    • Spring rolls are wrapped in a thin wheat flour wrapper while summer rolls are wrapped in rice paper (so naturally gluten-free).
    • Spring rolls are generally served hot while summer rolls are served chilled.
    • Fillings vary with spring rolls having cooked fillings with pork, shrimp, cabbage, carrots, and mushrooms, while summer rolls often include shrimp, pork, rice noodles, lettuce, herbs such as mint, cilantro, or basil, and sometimes carrots and cucumbers.
    • Summer rolls are generally considered a healthier option because they are not fried.
    • Wrapper, fillings, and cooking methods used vary depending on the regional culture, though they usually include vegetables.

    Chef's tip: Another inexpensive little tool called a julienne peeler gives you perfect long, thin strips of carrot, zucchini, and bell pepper. So easy! Works well with cucumber too, which you could add.

    How to Make Vegetable Spring Rolls

    If you feel like you are all thumbs rolling your first vegetable spring rolls, don't give up. They are kind of sticky, but you will get the hang of it. If you mess up the first ones, dump out the filling and start over with a new wrapper.  If your wrap tears, wrap it in a second rice paper. They are fun to make and delicious to eat.

    Step-by-step photos of how to make spring rolls with rice paper and raw vegetable filing.

    Step 1: Dip the wrappers in warm water briefly,  just a few seconds to soften them. Use a wide shallow dish like a pie plate.

    Step 2: Place rice paper wrapper on a cutting board. Working quickly, layer herbs and vegetables on the ⅓ closest to you, and start to roll. The wrapper will be sticky. Roll part of the way to the center, then fold sides in like you are rolling a burrito and finish the roll.

    To make the dipping sauce, simply whisk all of the ingredients together until smooth in a small bowl.

    Another good dipping sauce is hoisin. There are decent store brands available but you can also make homemade hoisin sauce (which is what I do) to control all of the ingredients and insure it's gluten-free.

    Colorful vegetable summer rolls with a rainbow of colors in brown rice paper on a light green plate.

    Serving Suggestions

    After assembling, arrange the rolls in a single layer on a flat platter or rimmed baking sheet and cover with plastic film. Don't stack them as they can stick together, then tear when you try to take them apart.

    To serve, slice the spring rolls in half, arrange them on a plate or platter, and serve with the dipping sauce.

    Recipe FAQs

    Are vegetable spring rolls healthy?

    Vegetables spring rolls are healthy because they are filled with raw vegetables and fresh herbs, like cilantro, mint, and basil. Chervil is another nice herb if you can find it.

    How do I prevent fresh spring rolls from sticking together?

    To prevent spring rolls from sticking together, do not stack them on top of each other. If refrigerating before serving, lay them in a single flat layer on a plate or baking sheet. You can line the plate with a damp paper towel them cover the rolls in plastic film to prevent drying out.

    What protein can I add to vegetable spring rolls?

    If you want to add protein to vegetables spring rolls, try layering in either small shrimp or larger shrimp sliced in half lengthwise. Tofu is another good option. Also used is small bits of cooked pork or chicken.

    Can I make vegetable spring rolls ahead of time?

    Spring rolls are best freshly made, but you can make them a few hours ahead of time and refrigerate them in a single layer covered in plastic wrap. Made too far ahead, the rice paper gets kind of chewy and rubbery.

    More Veggie-Focused Recipes

    • White shallow bowl stilled with green cabbage coleslaw, carrots, and parsley with a light dressing.
      Simple Easy Coleslaw Recipe
    • broccoli cabbage slaw
      Broccoli Slaw Recipe with Creamy Apple Cider Dressing
    • chinese chicken salad
      Healthy Chicken Salad Recipe with Ginger Salad Dressing

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make these vegetable spring rolls, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    rainbow spring rolls

    Fresh Vegetable Spring Rolls with Peanut Dipping Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Crunchy, colorful and cool, these little bundles of vegetables make a great appetizer or light meal. White rice wrappers are more common at the store, but look for brown rice wrappers as well. This recipe scales easily up or down depending on how you plan to use it. This recipe is planned for appetizer portions. Optional dipping sauce recipe in notes, or try the Asian almond sauce on this site. 
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine Asian
    Servings 6
    Calories 160 kcal

    Equipment

    • Pie plate sized shallow dish to soak wrappers

    Ingredients
      

    Vegetable spring rolls

    • 12  brown rice or white rice spring roll wrappers
    • 1 large zucchini
    • 3 large carrots
    • 1 large red or yellow bell pepper
    • 1 package sprouts of choice
    • ½ small red cabbage
    • 1 bunch fresh herbs - mint, basil, or cilantro
    • 1 small head red lettuce washed and dried
    • lime wedges optional

    Peanut Dipping Sauce

    • ½ cup Hoisin sauce no HFCS, or homemade
    • 2 tablespoons lime juice 1 large lime
    • 2 tablespoon creamy peanut butter
    • 1 tablespoon unseasoned rice vinegar
    • 2 teaspoons low sodium soy sauce or tamari (gluten-free)
    • 2 teaspoons finely grated fresh ginger sub tube puree or jar
    • 1 garlic clove finely chopped, grated, or zested

    Instructions
     

    Peanut Dipping Sauce

    • Add all ingredients to a bowl and whisk or stir until smooth.

    Vegetable Spring Rolls

    • Prep vegetables and herbs: Cut zucchini and carrots into long, fine strips with a julienne peeler for the fastest, easiest cutting, then cut the fine strips into pieces about 4″ long. Cut the bell pepper into long, fine strips by hand with a sharp knife. Finely slice the cabbage with a sharp knife, or if you have a mandoline use that.
      Remove the leaves from herb stems. No need to chop them. Tear lettuce leave into small pieces. Place all vegetables on a rimmed baking sheet, large casserole or into small bowls
    • Assemble the spring rolls, fill a large bowl half way with warm water. Working on a cutting board other flat surface, dip one rice wrapper into the water briefly, just a few seconds. The wrapper will be a bit stiff at first and soften as you work. They get a little sticky. Just go with it and you will get the hang of it.
      Place the wrapper on a cutting board or plate. Starting at the end closest to you, lay a few herbs down in ⅓ of the wrapper, then top with a few strips of each vegetable. Don't go all of the way to the edges as you will fold the sides in like a burrito.
      Start rolling the vegetables and wrap snugly until you get about half way, then fold in sides and continue rolling to complete a roll. Place the finished spring roll on a plate. Now make more!
    • To eat, cut the finished spring rolls in half and serve with dipping sauce of choice.

    Notes

    Substitutions and Variations
    • For protein, add small shrimp, tofu, or cooked pork.
    • Another good add is rice vermicelli (bean thread) noodles.
    • Swap the peanut butter for creamy almond butter, cashew butter.
    • For nut allergies, use creamy sunflower butter or tahini in the dipping sauce. 
    •  
    •  
    •  

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2rollsCalories: 160kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 6gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 0.2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 3mgSodium: 266mgPotassium: 512mgFiber: 4gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 8323IUVitamin C: 86mgCalcium: 75mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Zucchini Gratin with Parmesan Crust

    09/10/2013 by Sally Cameron 9 Comments

    Zucchini Casserole with Parmesan Crumb Topping

    Zucchini Gratin is pure summer comfort in under 30 minutes. Thinly sliced zucchini sauté briefly, then baked until bubbly and golden under a Parmesan-breadcrumb crust. It's light without being skimpy-no heavy eggs or cream-and perfect for pairing with grilled meats or enjoying as a warm, veggie-first side any night of the week.

    Easy zucchini casserole with a golden cheesy crust in a white oval casserole.

    While gardens and markets are overflowing with beautiful summer squash, this zucchini gratin is my favorite way to enjoy it-simple, fresh, and never heavy. Instead of burying the vegetables in cream, mayonnaise, or mounds of cheese, I keep it light so the zucchini flavor shines, finishing with just enough Parmesan and crisp gluten-free breadcrumbs for a satisfying crunch.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Zucchini Gratin

    • Great for all of that summer zucchini.
    • Easy and quick recipe.
    • Nice summer side dish.

    Here's another easy summer zucchini casserole with tomatoes and herbs.

    What You'll Need

    A counter full of green zucchini, parsley, garlic cloves, and shallots.
    • Oil: I prefer olive oil but a neutral healthy oil or avocado oil is good too.
    • Zucchini: Green zucchini is what I used the first time but you can mix yellow and green for more color.
    • Shallot: Petite member of the onion family with a lovely flavor, and a classic in French cooking.
    • Garlic: For that marvelous pungent flavor. Fresh is best, but the tube puree is good too (just read the label for additives).
    • Fresh herbs: Fresh parsley and fresh thyme leaves make a terrific combo.
    • Breadcrumbs: Either homemade toasted breadcrumbs or store-bought, and gluten -free if needed.
    • Parmesan: For a nice crisp, crunchy, crust.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Swap dried thyme for fresh if fresh is not available. Use ⅓ the amount.
    • Swap Pecorino Romano or Piave for the Parmesan cheese.
      If you eat wheat, panko crumbs are a good substitution for regular toasted breadcrumbs.
    • Substitute chopped onion for the shallot.

    For another summery side with zucchini, try this Mexican squash with the nice addition of corn. For a main dish zucchini recipe try this cheesy stuffed zucchini recipe called Zucchini Involtini.

    Recipe Instructions

    Trim off the ends, then cut zucchini in half lengthwise. Cut the halves into thin half moons about. Cook the zucchini quickly in a hot pan with olive oil for just a few minutes until it is starting to brown a bit at the edges.

    Turn the heat down, add shallot and cook a minute or two, then add the garlic and cook for 30 seconds more. Stir in fresh herbs.

    Pouring cooked zucchini into a shallow casserole dish for baking.

    Pour zucchini into a shallow casserole baking dish that is broiler-safe. The one I use is an 8″x12″ oval baking dish and about 2 quarts. The key is to choose a shallow baking dish, no matter what shape, so everyone gets a good serving of the crunchy topping.

    Homemade bread crumbs in container with a label.

    Lightly oil the dish so nothing sticks. Pour in the zucchini, top with a combination of gluten-free (or wheat) breadcrumbs and Parmesan. Pop under a hot broiler for a minute or two until golden and enjoy!

    The finished baked casserole with Parmesan crumb topping.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve alongside of grilled meats in summertime or easy baked chicken breasts. Zucchini casserole is bets enjoyed the day of cooking as it will soften up (but it still taste good).

    Looking for more zucchini recipes? Try this terrific zucchini muffins. Light, tender muffins great for breakfast or a snack.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long does it take to bake a zucchini casserole?

    It depends on the ingredients. Some recipes that are heavy with eggs and cheese may take up to 45 minutes in the oven. Rather than baking, this recipe starts with a quick saute and finishes under the broiler for a crispy top crust. Faster and easier.

    Can I make a zucchini casserole without eggs?

    Yes, here is how you make a zucchini casserole without eggs. Chop zucchini into bite-sized pieces, saute until crisp-tender and add a little chopped shallot, pour into an oiled shallow casserole and top with a parmesan crumb topping, then broil until browned and crisp. No eggs needed! It's lighter, easier zucchini casserole.

    What are some variations of zucchini casserole?

    Variations on a zucchini casserole include adding different types of cheese, incorporating other vegetables like tomatoes or bell peppers, using different herbs and spices, or adding a protein such as cooked chicken, ground beef, or sausage.

    More Summertime Side Dish Recipes

    Looking for more super summer side dish recipes? Try these or take a look at this link for more summertime recipe ideas.

    • Chopped cucumber salad in a gray bowl with feta cheese crumbles and green herbs.
      Cucumber and Dill Salad with Feta
    • Cold green bean salad with cherry tomatoes, corn, feta and red onion in a white bowl.
      Cold Green Bean Salad With Tomatoes and Corn
    • Closeup of corn succotash with red and green peppers and bacon.
      Sweet Corn Succotash with Bacon
    • Closeup of grilled corn on the cob with herb butter.
      Grilled Corn on the Cob with Garlic Herb Butter

    ⭐️Did you Make This?

    If you make this zucchini casserole, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating. They really help other readers. Any questions? Just ask. I'm here to help.

    📖 Recipe

    Zucchini Casserole with Parmesan Crumb Topping

    Easy Zucchini Gratin with Parmesan Crust

    Sally Cameron
    This quick casserole, also know as a gratin, doesn't smother the zucchini in heavy cheese or cream. It uses shallot, garlic and herbs for fresh, light flavor with an easy, crunchy topping sure to make even non-vegetable lovers take notice. I use a 2 quart shallow 8″ x 12″  oval baking dish but use whatever shape you have. The key is shallow so everyone gets a good serving of the crunchy topping. Be sure your dish is broiler-safe.
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 166 kcal

    Equipment

    • Shallow, broiler-safe casserole dish 1 - ½ quart size

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 tablespoons olive oil divided use
    • 2 pounds zucchini 7-8 small
    • 1 large shallot finely chopped
    • 2 large garlic cloves finely chopped
    • 2 tablespoons freshly chopped parsley
    • 1 tablespoon freshly chopped thyme leaves or 1 teaspoon dried
    • ⅓ cup grated Parmesan cheese
    • ¼ cup toasted breadcrumbs gluten-free or whole wheat
    • ¼ teaspoon Sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Instructions
     

    Set up the Broiler

    • Adjust oven rack to the medium level or one level up and pre-heat the broiler. Lightly oil a shallow 2 quart, broiler safe baking dish with a little of the olive oil.

    Make topping

    • Combine breadcrumbs and Parmesan along with 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a small bowl and stir together until well blended.

    Trim Zucchini

    • Trim ends from zucchini and quarter them lengthwise. Lay the quarters flat and holding your knife level with the cutting board, trim out the seeds, spongy center. If zucchini are small there maybe more be much, if they are large, there will be more.

    Cook Zucchini and Shallots

    • Heat the other 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large 12" saute pan over medium heat. Add zucchini to the pan and cook until it is softened and starting to brown at the edges but do not let it get too soft, stirring and turning frequently, about 5 minutes. Sprinkle in the shallot and cook 1 minute. Add garlic and cook 30 seconds. Stir in herbs.

    Bake Casserole

    • Pour zucchini into the oiled or buttered baking dish and spread the crumb topping evenly over top. Broil until casserole has a golden crunchy top. Serve hot.

    Notes

    • Swap dried thyme for fresh if fresh is not available. Use ⅓ the amount.
    • Swap Pecorino Romano or Piave for the Parmesan cheese.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 166kcalCarbohydrates: 16gProtein: 6gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gCholesterol: 7mgSodium: 348mgPotassium: 658mgFiber: 4gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 778IUVitamin C: 48mgCalcium: 126mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Sweet Corn Succotash with Bacon

    07/14/2023 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    Closeup of corn succotash with red and green peppers and bacon.

    The vibrant colors of summer in a bowl of sweet summer corn succotash with bacon. A sure to please delicious side dish for dinner. With fresh ears of corn on the cob, red sweet bell peppers, and edamame you can make it in 30 minutes. In winter, use frozen corn kernels. Skip the bacon for a vegan succotash. There's no sufferin' succotash with this recipe!

    A colorful bowl of sweet corn succotash with bacon, yellow, red and green in a white bowl.

    Sweet corn succotash has deep history. Originally, 17th century Native Americans shared this mixed vegetable side dish with pilgrims. It was also popular recipe during the great depression for it's readily available and inexpensive ingredients and eventually became a Southern staple.

    Generally made with corn, sweet peppers and lima beans, I swap limas for edamame and add fresh herbs and savory salty bacon for my own spin. A little jalapeño is good too.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • The perfect side dish for summer.
    • Pairs with many main dishes.
    • Make it with bacon or without.
    • Use either lima beans or edamame (frozen is fine).

    If you like beans, try this quick and easy three bean salad with Dijon vinaigrette and for more to do with bountiful summer corn, try this creamy corn chowder (vegan and dairy-free options).

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for sweet summer corn succotash.
    • Corn: Use fresh sweet corn on the cob in summer months or frozen corn kernels in winter.
    • Beans: Either edamame (soybeans) or lima beans for corn succotash. Frozen is fine if fresh is not available and easy to keep on hand. For prepping ease, choose shelled edamame, otherwise buy the pods and shell them yourself. It's a little more work but not bad.
    • Bell pepper: Sweet red bell pepper adds beautiful color and flavor.
    • Jalapeno pepper: For a little flavor boost, adds good color too. If you like things hot, use a hotter pepper, or skip. It's optional.
    • Shallot: A mild sweet member of the onion family, or use red onion.
    • Cooking fat: Use olive oil or avocado oil, or bacon drippings.
    • Garlic: Use fresh garlic cloves for the best flavor.
    • Thyme: Use fresh thyme leaves or ⅓ the amount of dried thyme.
    • Bacon: Adds savory, salty flavor that pairs great with corn succotash (optional).

    Please see quantities on the recipe card with detailed instructions.

    Substitutions and Variations

    A good thing about this sweet corn succotash recipe is it's flexible, and the combination of vegetables can't be beat.

    • If you are heat sensitive, use a mild green pepper such as a green bell pepper or an Anaheim chili pepper.
    • For herb variations, use fresh chopped cilantro at the end, fresh chopped Italian parsley. Fresh basil is nice too or a little chopped fresh oregano.
    • If you are soy-allergic or sensitive, use lima beans or fava beans. Even cooked chopped French green beans work well.
    • Make corn succotash more substantial by adding cooked quinoa, it makes a great lunch.
    • Make this corn succotash, make grilled corn on the cob instead of boiling.

    For more recipe ideas try this corn and quinoa salad or this quinoa tabbouleh salad recipe with lots of fresh parsley.

    Chef's Tip: Choosing produce. Go organic if possible or look for a non-GMO label. Conventionally grown soybeans and corn are usually genetically engineered (now called bioengineered). Red bell peppers are on the Dirty Dozen list for produce with high levels of pesticides. For corn and soybeans or limas, frozen bags are handy to stock in the freezer if fresh is not available.

    Recipe Instructions

    Fill a large 5-6 quart pot ¾ full of water, add salt, and bring to a boil.

    Cooking yellow corn on the cob in a pot of boiling water.
    Step 1: Cook corn in boiling water for 3 minutes. Remove and save water.
    Slicing cooked corn kernels off the cob for succotash.
    Step 2: Cut cobs in half, stand them on end, cut corn off of the cobs with a sharp knife.
    Cooking bright green edamame in boiling water.
    Step 3: In same water, cook edamame 4 minutes, drain and run cold water over pods, either shelled or not.
    Shelled edamame and spent pods in glass bowls.
    Step 4: Shell edamame, discard pods, add to corn.
    Cooking shallots and garlic in a saute pan.
    Step 5: Cook bacon, drain off most of the fat, cook shallot or onion, garlic. If no bacon, use olive oil.
    Sautéing red and green pepper in a saute pan.
    Step 6: Add red and green peppers to the pan, cooking until softened.
    Colorful corn, red and green peppers and bacon in a saute pan.
    Step 7: Add corn, edamame, plus crisply cooked bacon back to the pan; stir to finish.

    Chef's Tip: Soy dietary controversy. This corn succotash recipe uses whole soybeans. As with most foods, the whole form is healthy. It's the processed forms of soy that are a big problem health wise. Processed forms like soy protein isolate and textured vegetable protein are best avoided. And be sure it's organic or labeled as non-GMO. Avoid mass market soy "vegetable" oil that is GMO and processed with high heat and chemical solvents. So edamame? It's good and high protein (unless your soy-sensitive).

    Closeup of corn succotash with red and green peppers, edamame and bacon.

    Serving Suggestions

    The perfect summer side dish, serve corn succotash either warm, room temperature, or chilled. Chilled, it kind of a corn salad. It pairs well with many main course options. Try it with:

    • Sliced grilled chicken breast or bbq chicken.
    • Grilled, or baked shrimp. Try this easy grilled shrimp recipe and omit the prosciutto.
    • Make this easy steamed salmon recipe and serve it chilled atop the corn succotash.
    • Slices of marinated grilled flank steak.
    • Roasted or grilled pork tenderloin.

    Corn succotash keep up to 4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the meaning of corn succotash?

    Of 17th century origin, succotash is a Narragansett Indian word "msickquatash" meaning boiled corn kernels or broken corn kernels. It's traditionally a mix of shell beans, such as lima beans, and corn.

    When should you eat succotash?

    Enjoy succotash year round. In summer when corn on the cob is best, and it's also a nice transition dish from summer into fall. Frozen corn kernels and edamame or lima beans make it delicious and enjoyable year round today.

    What do you eat succotash with?

    Succotash is a versatile side dish. Enjoy it with roast or grilled chicken, seafood, even steaks. It's even good at the Thanksgiving table with roast turkey.

    What does the phrase suffering succotash or sufferin' succotash mean?

    It's an exclamation of dismay or frustration by famous Disney Looney Toons character, Sylvester the cat.

    More Easy Summer Side Dish Recipes

    For more easy summer side dishes, try these recipes.

    • Cold green bean salad with cherry tomatoes, corn, feta and red onion in a white bowl.
      Cold Green Bean Salad With Tomatoes and Corn
    • Broccoli bacon salad
      Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon
    • broccoli cabbage slaw
      Broccoli Slaw Recipe with Creamy Apple Cider Dressing
    • Mediterranean potato salad
      French Potato Salad

    ⭐️Did you Make This?

    If you make this sweet corn succotash recipe, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Closeup of corn succotash with red and green peppers and bacon.

    Sweet Corn Succotash with Bacon

    Sally Cameron
    A modern update to a traditional side dish, my corn succotash uses whole edamame (soybeans) instead of lima beans, but you can use limas if preferred. Use fresh corn on the cob in summer and frozen corn in winter. Crisp bacon and jalapeno pepper is optional.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 to 8
    Calories 257 kcal

    Equipment

    • saute pan

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 ears corn on the cob, cleaned sub frozen thawed kernels, 2 cups
    • 4 ounces bacon (optional) chopped into strips crosswise
    • 1 pound frozen edamame in shell sub frozen shelled edamame, 6-8 ounces
    • 1 large red bell pepper chopped small
    • 1 medium jalapeño pepper chopped small (optional)
    • ½ small red onion or 1 large shallot, chopped fine
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil or use bacon fat
    • 2 large garlic cloves finely chopped
    • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme leaves, chopped sub 1 teaspoon dried thyme
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Instructions
     

    Boil water, cook bacon

    • While a large pot of salted water is coming to a boil, cook the bacon in fry pan until brown and crisp. Strain onto layers of paper towels. Save a little bacon fat to cook veggies or use olive oil.
      Do not wash the pan; use it to cook shallot and garlic.

    Cook corn and edamame

    • Lower the corn into boiling water and cook for 3 minutes. Remove corn cobs with tongs and drain on a kitchen towel. When cool enough to handle, cut kernels from cob and place in a medium bowl. Cutting the cobs crosswise in half and standing them on end to slice kernels off makes it easier.
      In same pot with water still boiling, cook frozen edamame for 4 minutes and strain, run cold water over them, and shell. Add to the corn.

    Cook veggies and finish succotash

    • Cook the onion in the fry pan until soft, then add garlic and cook 1 minute longer. Add the red and green peppers and thyme and cook until soft, 2-3 minutes, then add the corn and edamame and stir everything together.
      Add any additional herbs if desired and succotash is ready to serve.
      Leftover succotash holds in the refrigerator in an airtight container up to 4 days and is good warmed, room temperature, or cold.

    Notes

    For frozen corn kernels: cook according to package directions, drain, and place in a medium bowl and continue with the recipe.
    If you are heat sensitive, use a mild green pepper such as a green bell pepper or an Anaheim chili pepper
    For herb variations, use fresh chopped cilantro at the end, fresh chopped Italian parsley. Fresh basil is nice too or a little chopped fresh oregano.
     
     
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 257kcalCarbohydrates: 22gProtein: 13gFat: 15gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.04gCholesterol: 12mgSodium: 238mgPotassium: 619mgFiber: 6gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 1056IUVitamin C: 49mgCalcium: 60mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Classic Homemade Cocktail Sauce

    12/26/2023 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    A jar of bright red cocktail sauce (seafood sauce) in a glass jar.

    Skip the store-bought bottles and make this easy homemade cocktail sauce recipe (aka seafood sauce). It takes 5 minutes! It's fresh, fast, and adjustable to your tastebuds whether you want it mild or with spicy flavor. Pair it up with chilled shrimp for a classic shrimp cocktail, a go-to appetizer for holidays and get-togethers. You'll never buy cocktail sauce or seafood sauce again.

    A jar of homemade cocktail sauce with a white spoon surrounded by cooked shrimp and lemons.

    This is the best shrimp cocktail sauce and so simple to make. Plus there are many uses beyond serving with America's favorite seafood. The sweetness of the ketchup is offset by tart lemon juice and heat of horseradish and tabasco. Make your own cocktail sauce!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Simple ingredients.
    • Make it in a minute.
    • You control the ingredients plus fun variations.

    For a twist on a classic shrimp cocktail, try these roasted garlic shrimp for a terrific appetizer.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients in bowls for homemade cocktail sauce.
    • Ketchup: the base for my homemade cocktail sauce recipe. Read labels for low or no sugar added and skip brands with poor quality ingredients such as high fructose corn syrup (HFCS) and corn syrup. Here's the ketchup I use, available at most markets.
    • Horseradish: adds that classic cocktail sauce kick and a little texture. Add a little or a lot. Read the label and buy a prepared horseradish brand without high fructose corn syrup (HFCS). Look in the refrigerated section of your grocery store. Read labels carefully, its not the same as horseradish sauce.
    • Lemon juice: for a lift of bright flavor. Use real fresh lemon juice optimally for best flavor. The bottled stuff has preservatives and lemon oil in it.
    • Worcestershire sauce: adds savory umami flavor to cocktail sauce and many other recipes like this awesome beef stew. Look for GF or vegan options if needed and no high fructose corn syrup (HFCS).
    • Garlic: preferably a fresh garlic clove, but in a pinch garlic powder will do.
    • Onion powder: optional. Just a little adds depth of flavor, and powder is easy to have on hand.
    • Balsamic vinegar: Not traditional in cocktail sauce but I love the subtle complex flavor it adds.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip: Horseradish brands vary in potency, so start with less and add as you go to test the heat, especially if you are heat-sensitive. Build it up for your personal preference. Also, read labels for a clean ingredient brand.

    For another terrific homemade sauce you can make mild or hot, try this harissa aioli! Great with shrimp, tacos, as a dip, and much more.

    A jar of red cocktail sauce with horseradish in a claer jar on white plate.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Add spices for more a more complex flavor. Try smoked smoked paprika, ancho chili powder, ground clove, ground allspice, and ground chipotle pepper. Clove and allspice are strong, so just a little will do. The chipotle gives this cocktail sauce a kick but also contributes to smoky flavor.
    • Make it a spicy cocktail sauce: Add extra horseradish, your favorite hot sauce, or try ground chipotle pepper, or chipotles in adobo sauce. Both add a smoky flavor.
    • Tamarind: The sweet-sour flavor of tamarind is great added to sauces and marinades. It takes just a little to lift the flavor of this cocktail sauce. It really adds flavor if you like to try new things. Buy a paste or puree. The tart fruity flavor both sharpens and rounds out flavors.
    • Swap chili sauce for the ketchup if you prefer.
    • Swap lime juice for lemon juice or use cider vinegar is out of citrus.

    How to Make Cocktail Sauce

    One garnish tip, before you juice the lemon, zest it for sprinkling on top for the color if you'd like.

    Seafood sauce ingredients in a glass bowl for mixing.
    One step: Simply add all ingredients to a bowl and stir until smooth. For smoother sauce, puree in a blender.

    Don't you love one step easy recipes? Adjust the taste with additional horseradish for more kick, additional lemon juice for more tang, or more Tabasco for more heat. See the variations section for other add-ins if you want to play with the basic recipe.

    Cooked shrimp appetizer in a bowl with lemon slices, cocktail sauce in the center jar.

    Serving Suggestions

    Homemade cocktail sauce is perfect with pre-cooked shrimp for a classic shrimp cocktail appetizer. To serve shrimp, I squeeze fresh lemon juice all over them and sprinkle with lemon pepper. Serve with:

    • Almost anywhere you would use plain ketchup.
    • With cold shrimp as a dipping sauce for a shrimp cocktail appetizer. 
    • Smear on a burger or hot dog.
    • As a dip with fries and sweet potato fries.
    • As a veggie dip.
    • Garnish homemade deviled eggs.
    • For scrambled eggs and omelets.
    • Serve with steamed artichokes along with melted butter.
    • Cocktail sauce is a natural with crab cakes and crab legs. 
    • For dipping with mozzarella sticks.

    Leftover sauce? Tomato-based sauces generally freeze fine so try freezing cocktail sauce in an ice cube tray then thawing cubes as needed overnight in the refrigerator.

    If you want to serve a second, different sauce alongside of the cocktail sauce, try this Green Goddess Dip, it's another perfect accompaniment to seafood.

    Chef's tip: For really fine fresh garlic that melts into a recipe like cocktail sauce, skip chopping with a knife and use a microplane zester. Works like a charm! Be sure to rinse the zester right after with hot water as garlic is sticky.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is fresh or prepared horseradish better?

    Both prepared horseradish and horseradish root can work. Prepared horseradish is easier to use as it's "prepared" for you, finely chopped or grated and pickled in vinegar. If it's juicy, drain off the vinegar so as not to add too much liquid to your sauce. If you prefer fresh horseradish root, be aware it's much hotter and spicer than prepared. Peel the root and very finely grate. Start with half as much (or less) and build up to your preferred heat level.

    How can I make the cocktail sauce spicier or milder?

    The best way to customize the spice and heat level of cocktail sauce is to start by making a mild sauce and add heat as you go to get the the level you want. Typically recipes use horseradish and hot sauce.

    Fresh horseradish is hotter and spicer than prepared horseradish. Another way to add heat is with a hot sauce such as Tabasco sauce or your favorite hot sauce. Another option is to add chipotle powder or chipotle peppers in adobo sauce for more heat and a smoky flavor.

    How far in advance can I make cocktail sauce?

    Make homemade cocktail sauce (aka seafood sauce) a day or two ahead to save time and let the flavors blend. Store it in an airtight container for no longer than two weeks. Be sure to label and date the container. It doesn't last as long as the jarred stuff but as it's so easy to make you can make it when needed and it's fresh.

    More Related Recipes

    For more fresh and easy sauce and dip recipes, try these and be sure to check out the appetizer recipe page and the sauce recipes page.

    • Closeup of mushroom pate in a white ramekin with a spoon.
      Classic French Mushroom Duxelle
    • A glass jar with rich brown hoisin sauce and a whisk for mixing.
      Gluten-Free Hoisin Sauce
    • asian almond sauce in a bowl
      No-Cook Asian Dipping Sauce With Almond Butter

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make homemade cocktail sauce, please comment and let me know. I enjoy hearing from you and appreciate your feedback. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating. They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A jar of bright red cocktail sauce (seafood sauce) in a glass jar.

    Homemade Cocktail Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Whip this up in seconds and skip the jarred stuff from the store. It's healthier as you choose what goes into it. If you like it hot, add more horseradish and hot sauce. See recipe notes for more variation ideas.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course condiment
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 24 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup ketchup
    • 2 tablespoons prepared horseradish less if heat sensitive
    • 1 tablespoon worcestershire sauce
    • 2 teaspoons lemon juice fresh squeezed
    • 1 teaspoons Balsamic vinegar
    • ½ teaspoon Tabasco sauce more or less for your tastebuds, optional
    • ¼ teaspoon onion powder optional
    • ⅛ teaspoon sea salt
    • 1 large garlic clove finely zested

    Instructions
     

    • Combine all ingredients into a small bowl and whisk together. Taste and adjust seasoning for your preference. See variations below. Cocktail sauce keeps up to 2 weeks in an airtight container in the refrigerator.

    Notes

    Variations

      • Add spices for more a more complex flavor. Try smoked smoked paprika, ancho chili powder, ground clove, a little cinnamon, ground allspice, and ground chipotle pepper. Clove and allspice are strong, so just a little will do. The chipotle gives this cocktail sauce a kick but also contributes to smoky flavor.
      • Make it spicier: Another way to add heat is with your favorite hot sauce.
      • Tamarind: The sweet-sour flavor of tamarind is great added to sauces and marinades. It takes just a little to lift the flavor of this cocktail sauce. It really adds flavor if you like to try new things. Buy a paste or puree. The tart fruity flavor both sharpens and rounds out flavors.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2tablespoonsCalories: 24kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 0.1gFat: 0.03gSaturated Fat: 0.004gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.01gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.01gSodium: 87mgPotassium: 31mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 2IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 6mgIron: 0.1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Caprese Skewers with Basil Vinaigrette

    06/15/2015 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    caprese skewers

    Like a little Caprese salad on a stick, these Caprese skewers are a hit appetizer and so easy to assemble. Featuring colorful summer cherry tomatoes, creamy mini mozzarella balls and fresh, bright green basil leaves. For a tasty finish drizzle with basil pesto vinaigrette or use Balsamic syrup.

    Colorful caprese appetizer skewers with cherry tomatoes, mozzarella balls, and basil leaves on a tray.

    Whether you are gathering to celebrate the "big game", Father's Day, 4th of July or just casually gathering with friends, make some of these fresh and easy appetizers. no cooking involved!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    The Famous Salad

    You might be familiar with the famous Italian Caprese salad, created to resemble the colors of the Italian flag. In Italy, it is usually served as a starter or antipasto.

    Caprese salad is standard summer fare at our house when colorful heirloom tomatoes are at their peak. It's simply slices of fresh, ripe tomatoes and creamy mozzarella (or buratta) cheese with fresh basil leaves tucked between the slices, dressed with good olive oil. The simplicity is beautiful.

    Ingredient Tips

    For years I've made an appetizer version of this salad for catered parties and family events. Instead of full size tomatoes and large balls mozzarella, think smaller. Choose cherry or small grape tomatoes for their size. If available choose multi-colors for more visual appeal.

    While many recipes skewer the whole tomato, I like to get the cherry size and cut them in half crosswise. They look so nice on the skewers, and they don't explode quite as much in your mouth, so they are easier to eat.

    Skewer Size

    Use mini bamboo skewers to assemble the skewers. The 5"- 6" size work perfect. If all you have is larger ones, cut them down to size with scissors.

    Basil leaves and red and yellow cherry tomatoes for Caprese skewers.

    Cheese Please

    For the mozzarella, I buy what is called Ciliegine, fresh, mini mozzarella balls. If all you are familiar with is the hard rubber balls of mozzarella for shredding pizza, you are in for a nice surprise. Fresh mozzarella is soft. It comes packaged in liquid to keep it soft and fresh. Don't dump out the liquid. Store any used mozzarella in the container with the brine.

    Assembling caprese skewers with basil, mozzarella, tomatoes, and mini skewers.

    Basil Vinaigrette

    For basil leaves, buy a bunch, wash and dry the leaves, then choose the best leaves for the skewers. Use the rest to make the pesto. Choose smaller leaves, rather than the big giant ones. You can even use two small to medium leaves and fold them together.

    For produce wash I use Eat Cleaner, on my basil and the tomatoes as well.

    Making homemade pesto is quick and easy with a food processor. My recipe is here. Why bother making it? Homemade is always better, and you know exactly what goes into it, and no unwanted additives. You can also control the flavor for what you like. In a hurry? Buy a good store brand.

    Once the pesto is made, add a little more olive oil and lemon juice to thin for the vinaigrette to dress the skewers.

    Skewers on small serving plates with basil vinaigrette, red and white checked tablecloth.

    Serving

    To serve, layer the skewers on a platter and drizzle with the basil vinaigrette. A little quirt of Balsamic syrup or vinegar is good too. To make your own Balsamic glaze (syrup), here is my recipe.

    📖 Recipe

    Caprese Skewers with Basil Vinaigrette

    Sally Cameron
    An easy to make ahead appetizer that is always a hit, with sweet tomatoes, creamy mozzarella and homemade basil pesto vinaigrette. You will need 6″ bamboo skewers or cut longer ones down to size. This recipe scales up easily to feed more friends and family. Start by making homemade pesto. Find the recipe here. This recipe doubles or triples easily for parties!
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 4 to 6
    Calories 237 kcal

    Equipment

    • 12 Mini bamboo skewers

    Ingredients
      

    • 12 cherry tomatoes, halved multi-colored looks great
    • 12 mini mozzarella balls Ciliegine 3-per-ounce size
    • 1 bunch of basil so you can choose the best leaves
    • 3 tablespoons basil pesto homemade recipe link below
    • 1 ½ tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 ½ tablespoons lemon juice

    Tools

    Instructions
     

    • Make the vinaigrette by whisking together the basil pesto, oil and lemon juice. It should be fluid enough to drizzle over the skewers.
      Cut the tomatoes in half crosswise. Build skewers starting with a tomato half, then basil leaf, then a cheese ball, then leaf, the another tomato half. Lay skewers on a platter and drizzle with the vinaigrette and serve.

    Notes

    Link for homemade basil pesto
    For reference, I used the Traders Joes Ciliegine balls, which are 3 balls per serving/per ounce. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 237kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 11gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gCholesterol: 21mgSodium: 149mgPotassium: 80mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 399IUVitamin C: 10mgCalcium: 222mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Homemade Dark Chocolate Ice Cream

    06/25/2015 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    A white paper container of creamy dark chocolate ice cream on a blue counter with a scoop.

    With rich chocolate flavor and creamy texture, this dark chocolate ice cream will knock your socks off. It's always a huge hit. If you eat dairy-free, make it using canned coconut milk instead of dairy milk. It's like a soft serve chocolate ice cream and great right out of the machine. Get out that ice cream maker and let's make homemade chocolate ice cream.

    A white paper container of creamy dark chocolate ice cream on a blue counter with a scoop.

    Being married to a dark chocolate lover (and ice cream lover) is how this dark chocolate ice cream recipe came to be. But I also wanted one that would work for my dairy-sensitive friends. So here's a dark chocolate ice cream recipe you can make either way: with dairy milk or with canned coconut milk. It's a great swap for heavy cream. It's the best chocolate ice cream for both worlds.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Chocolate! Need I say more?
    • Cream, dreamy, delicious texture, dairy-free.
    • Deep flavor of dark chocolate or bittersweet chocolate.

    If you like making ice cream, try this homemade lemon ice cream. Use Meyer lemons for a real treat.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Dark chocolate: Also called bittersweet chocolate, 70%-72% rating. Skip dark cocoa powder and use bar chocolate. I also use these chocolate "gems" and don't chop.
    • Milk: For dairy-free dark chocolate ice cream use full fat canned coconut milk. If you are sensitive to guar gum be sure to read labels. For regular dark chocolate ice cream (not dairy-free), use half milk and half heavy cream (heavy whipping cream).
    • Eggs: You need just the yolks.
    • Vanilla extract: Real pure vanilla extract for flavor. Here's my favorite vanilla.
    • Sweetening: For no added sugar use liquid chocolate stevia drops, or use sugar.

    For measurements please see the recipe card.

    Chef's note: Sugar, stevia drops, and monk fruit all effect the freeze-abiity of this dark chocolate ice cream differently. Sugar and common ice cream ingredients like corn syrup do not freeze well so ice cream stays softer when frozen. If you make dark chocolate ice cream with coconut milk, enjoy as soft serve out of the machine or soon after it's done.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If you've never tried a little spice in your dark chocolate ice cream you might be pleasantly surprised how good it is. Spices to try include cinnamon and five spice.
    • Another sweetening option is granular monk fruit if you don't like the flavored stevia's.
    • Add finely chopped walnuts or pecans almost at the end, or a swirl of caramel sauce.

    This ice cream is best right out of the maker or after a short time in the freezer. Because this recipe has no added sugar, it freezes hard if left in the freezer too long.

    Chef's tip: When you have extra egg whites, make cookies! These chocolate chip meringue forgotten cookies are easy to make and use up those leftover egg whites.

    Recipe Instructions

    Step 1: Chop the chocolate. Chop chocolate using a long, serrated bread knife. It's easiest with a serrated knife or sharp chef's knife. Chop into small piece so that it melts easily and quickly.

    Chopped chocolate in a stainless steel bowl with serrated knife.
    A bowl of melted chocolate with a red spatula.

    Step 2: Melt chocolate. Set up a double boiler. Add a few inches of water to a large pot (4-5 quart) pot and bring to a simmer, turn down to medium low. Place a stainless steel or glass bowl on top. It should fit a little inside but not touch the water. This provides gentle, even heat for melting chocolate. Add chopped chocolate and stir occasionally with a rubber spatula.

    Step 3: Make custard. In a medium pot (a 3 qt saucier works great), heat the milk until steaming. Beat the egg yolks in a medium bowl until smooth, then slowly add a little of the hot milk and whisk quickly. Add slowly so you don't scramble the yolks. When ½ of the milk is added, add the yolk mixture back to the pot and stir until smooth. Cook over medium heat stirring until the custard coats the back of a spoon.

    Custard ice cream base chilling in a bowl with a strainer.

    Step 4: Strain the ice cream base. Pour the custard mixture through a fine-mesh sieve into the bowl of melted chocolate to catch any yolk bits. You want smooth ice cream. Stir until completed smooth. Add a pinch of sea salt.

    Step 5: Chill the base. To chill the ice cream base quickly, place the bowl in a sink full or a larger bowl of ice and cold water (called an ice bath). When it's very cold, place in the refrigerator until very cold.

    Rich dark chocolate ice cream just finished in the ice cream machine.

    Step 6: Churn ice cream. Add the ice cream mixture to your machine and process according to manufacturer's directions.

    For another dairy-free chocolate treat, try this coconut chocolate pudding.

    Small white bowls of creamy dark chocolate ice cream with silver spoons.

    Serving Suggestions

    This dark chocolate ice cream is best served soft-serve style either right out of the ice cream machine or after just a short time in the freezer. How much it hardens depends on if you use sugar or a sugar-alternative.

    In late summer when nectarines are in season, try this refreshing nectarine sorbet.

    Freezing Dark Chocolate Ice Cream

    If you leave dark chocolate ice cream in the freezer too long, especially made with a sugar-alternative, it might get hard. Let it warm up on the counter checking it once in awhile, then break it up with a table knife and stir well.

    I've done this intentionally twice to see how it came out. I was able to get the ice cream back to a softer consistency, but it is a lot of work when you just want a bowl of ice cream.

    The other thing I did was after it sat out awhile and softened up, I put it back in the ice cream machine and set it to churn and freeze. That smoothed it all out, but again, it's extra work. Just enjoy it soon after it's made.

    The Best Ice Cream Container

    I store my ice cream one of two ways: in disposable 16-ounce paper containers with lids or in a freezer-safe container like this. And check this out for the very best ice cream scoop.

    Chef's note: Well after this published, I found a small container of this still in the freezer. It was rock hard. I let it thaw in the fridge and it softened into an amazing rich pudding like consistency, so we ate it! It was terrific. Can't waste good chocolate, can we?

    Recipe FAQs

    What ingredients do I need for dark chocolate ice cream?

    To make dark chocolate ice cream start with good dark chocolate at 72%. For the rest of the ingredients, dark chocolate ice cream can be made with cream, half and half, whole milk, full fat coconut milk, or a combination. You'll also need a sweetener such as sugar. Some recipes have a custard base with egg yolks and some do not.

    How long does it take to churn dark chocolate ice cream?

    Churning time depends on your ice cream machine, anywhere from 30-40 minutes to an hour with most machines.

    What are some variations of dark chocolate ice cream?

    For creative twists on dark chocolate ice cream, try adding a spice such as cinnamon or five spice, finely chopped walnuts or pecans, or a swirl of caramel.

    More Chocolate Recipes

    If you love chocolate, try these chocolate recipes from breakfast to snacks and dessert.

    • Bark bites on a round display plate for serving.
      Chocolate Bark Recipe (bark bites)
    • two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.
      Chocolate Banana Smoothie
    • bittersweet chocolate pudding
      Chocolate Pots de Creme (Dairy-Free)
    • Chocolate Tart With Hazelnut Crust
      Decadent Chocolate Ganache Tart

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A white paper container of creamy dark chocolate ice cream on a blue counter with a scoop.

    Dark Chocolate Ice Cream (dairy-free or dairy)

    Sally Cameron
    This ultra-rich dark chocolate ice cream is creamy and decadent. Just a small scoop will do. Make it dairy-free or with dairy. Use high quality, 72% or higher bittersweet chocolate.  This recipe is soft serve style and best served right out of the machine or soon after. See notes in post. 
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Chill time for base 2 hours hrs
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 612 kcal

    Equipment

    • Ice Cream Maker

    Ingredients
      

    • 12 ounces good quality bittersweet chocolate 72%-85%
    • 2 ½ cups full fat canned coconut milk or half whole milk and heavy whipping cream.
    • 4 large egg yolks
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • ⅓ cup sugar or granulated monk fruit or 15-20 drops liquid chocolate stevia
    • a pinch of salt

    Instructions
     

    • Fill a 4-5 quart pan with a about 2 inches of water and bring to a simmer over medium-low heat. Chop chocolate into small pieces. A long serrated bread knife makes it easy.
    • Place the chopped chocolate in a medium stainless steel or glass bowl and place the bowl on top of the pan with the water. The bottom of the bowl should not touch the water. Turn the heat to low and melt the chocolate (so it stays smooth), stirring occasionally.
    • Heat the coconut milk in a 3 quart saucepan to just under a boil. Remove from the heat briefly. If using sugar or monk fruit add now and let it melt into the coconut milk, stirring.
      Whisk the egg yolks in a medium bowl until smooth. When coconut milk is hot, whisk a little of the hot milk into the eggs (called tempering). Add just a little at a time so you don't scramble the yolks. When about half of the milk is added, add the rest at once. Whisk until smooth.
    • Pour the egg and milk mixture back into the pan, place back on the heat, and cook stirring until it thickens and coats the back of a spoon, 5-7 minutes.
    • Pour the hot liquid custard through a fine strainer into the melted chocolate. Discard and yolks bits left in the strainer. If using stevia, add now. Stir until smooth.
    • Set up an ice bath: Fill a sink or a larger bowl half full with ice and cold water. Nestle the bowl into the ice bath to chill the ice cream base stirring to release the heat.
      When the base is below 70° (measure with a digital thermometer), place it in the refrigerator to chill further, about an hour. When the base is very cold, pour into your ice cream maker and process by manufacturer directions. Serve soft, right out of the maker or after a brief sit in the freezer.

    Notes

    This recipe is best enjoyed soon after making as it gets rock hard in the freezer if its in there too long. If you do leave it in the freezer and it gets rock hard, let it stand for an hour, then break it up with a table knife and stir well. I've done this twice to see how it came out. I was able to get the ice cream back to a softer consistency, but it is a lot of work when you just want a bowl of ice cream.
    The other thing I did was after it sat out awhile and softened up, I put it back in the ice cream machine and set it to churn and freeze. That smoothed it all out, but again, it's  extra work. Just enjoy it soon after it's made.
    Nutritional Note: If you make dark chocolate ice cream with monk fruit or stevia the sugar numbers are far lower. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 612kcalCarbohydrates: 45gProtein: 8gFat: 51gSaturated Fat: 37gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gCholesterol: 122mgSodium: 24mgPotassium: 278mgFiber: 8gSugar: 34gVitamin A: 163IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 31mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
    • « Previous Page
    • 1
    • …
    • 5
    • 6
    • 7
    • 8
    • 9
    • 10
    • Next Page »
    Chef Sally Cameron of aFoodcentricLife.com in her kitchen.

    Welcome! I'm Sally, a professionally trained chef, former personal chef and caterer, lover of fresh healthy food, and sharing it with others.

    More about me →

    Mother's Day Recipe Inspiration

    • Sliced of golden pound cake with strawberries and a small bowl of whipped cream.
      Gluten Free Pound Cake with Cream Cheese
    • Dutch baby oven pancakes
      Gluten-Free Dutch Baby (German Pancakes)
    • Baby dutch yellow potatoes wtih herbs and Parmesan cheese.
      Buttery Baby Dutch Yellow Potatoes
    • deviled eggs 2022
      Best Deviled Eggs Recipe (Step by Step)
    • Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.
      How to Make Steamed Salmon
    • Close up of crispy golden waffles with blueberries, raspberries, strawberries.
      Gluten Free Waffles (Crisp & Golden)

    More Recipe Ideas

    • Golden baked chicken breasts on the dinner table.
      Roast Split Chicken Breast
    • beef tenderloin on a plate.
      Roast Beef Tenderloin (Center-Cut Chateaubriand)
    • A bowl of bright green beans almondine with toasted buttered almonds.
      Fresh Green Beans Almondine Recipe
    • Pork tenderloin with creamy mustard sauce close up with a serving fork.
      Roast Pork Tenderloin with Dijon Mustard Sauce

    Footer

    as seen on

    Logos of Featured Publications

    About

    • Privacy Policy
    • Disclaimer
    • Terms & Conditions
    • Accessibility policy

    Newsletter

    • Sign Up! for emails and recipes.

    Menu

    • Home
    • About
    • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest

    As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Copyright © 2026 aFoodcentricLife.com

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required